Home

DataSuite User Guide

1. EC800 EC850 Rev B firmware v2 00 or higher only 13 7 1 LCD Status Messages e USB Indicates that the logger is connected to the PC via USB cable e Stop The logger is currently in Stop mode not sampling data e Run Visible immediately before the logger is about to start sampling data once the Run command was sent e Push Indicates the logger is in Push to Run mode as configured in the logger Setup window Press both logger buttons for 3 seconds to start running e tRUN Indicates the logger is in Timer Run mode as configured in the logger Setup window e T01 T02 etc Indicates that a time stamp has been taken by pressing both logger buttons for over 2 seconds while running 13 7 2 LCD Mode of Operation In the Display tab in the logger Setup window the user has the option to define several modes of operation for the LCD screen when sampling e Always On The LCD will never turn off e LCD is off and will turn on for 30 60 or 120 seconds upon alarm or key press In addition when the logger is not sampling in Stop mode the LCD will shut down after two minutes of inactivity in order to conserve battery life 13 8 LED Overview The MicroLogPRO II features a LED primarily to give real time indication of alarm and activation 134 FOURTEC e Sample with alarm The LED will flash red at ten second intervals once an alarm is recorded until the logger memory is cleared and only in Run mode e
2. DataSuite supports automatic software and firmware update whenever DataSuite is launched as long as the computer is connected to the Internet The update process is managed by Fourtec s Uptodata client This client checks for updated software and firmware files located on the Fourtec server and if any have been detected they are downloaded and updated on the user s computer The user can also have DataSuite automatically update the network units firmware or can choose to do so manually DagqLink MicroLogPRO II MicroLite and PicoLite all support easy firmware update via direct USB connection A major benefit specific to the DataNet system is that units firmware can also be updated over the air as well as via USB except for Mini DataNet Without moving one deployed DataNet unit out of position in the network the user can send a new firmware file wirelessly to all of the data logger end units and Repeaters The Receiver firmware is updated via the USB cable In addition to automatic firmware update the DataSuite user can also manually update the firmware via the Firmware Update Center or from the Logger Repeater icon in Map View Refer to the relevant sections in this chapter for more details Note If you are updating MicroLite Il v0 95 or MicroLogPRO II v1 31 firmware please refer to section 17 20 10 New Calibration Mechanism when Updating MicroLite and MicroLogPRO II Firmware prior to firmware update 18 1 Using the Up
3. MicroLite II Sensor Inputs Two point calibration and offset TRIO Type Calibration Method Temperature Digital cae Internal LITE5032P RH Two point calibration Humidity Internal _ Digital LITE5032P RH Oto 10V LITE5032P V Two point calibration Voltage Daaa Online calibration is not supported as external sensor cannot be connected to cap while logger is connected to computer via USB 226 f FOURTEC MicroLogPRO II Sensor Inputs Sensor Type Calibration Method Temperature a Internal Digital EC850 Two point calibration Humidity s a Internal Digital EC850 Two point calibration External Voltage Oto 10 V Two point calibration Note When switching between external inputs of the MicroLogPRO II you must perform the Reset Calibration for the specific external input within the Calibration window before running the logger This is because this device can only retain calibration settings of one external input type at a time and switching from one external input to another will result in incorrect readings unless you reset the calibration settings PicoLite Sensor Inputs Sensor Type Calibration Method TEA Ure NT
4. 3 Enter the password in the Password dialog box 4 A DataSuite system message will prompt you to confirm the update Click Yes 5 The firmware will begin updating and you can monitor its progress in the unit s tooltip Repeater DNAS00 Serial Number 912721 Fourier Systems LTD Connected to AC charging Connected via USB Version 3 1 2 18 Command Queue Progress 35 1 Upload Firmware File 2 Update Firmware 6 When complete disconnect the USB cable and reconnect the Receiver to continue using the DataNet system DNL910 DNL920 and PA Data Loggers 1 Make sure the data logger is joined to an existing network When connected to the computer via USB go to Devices gt Detect Device in the DataSuite main menu 2 Right click on the logger icon fal and select Update Firmware from the context menu 3 Enter the password in the Password dialog box 4 A DataSuite system message will prompt you to confirm the update Click Yes 5 The firmware will begin updating and you can monitor its progress in the unit s tooltip Logger DNLS10 Serial Number 913374 H DNL910 01 Battery Level 100 Connected via USB Version 3 4 2 21 Command Queue Progress 28 1 Upload Firmware File 2 Update Firmware 6 When complete disconnect the USB cable and reconnect the Receiver to continue using the DataNet system 18 2 5 Cancelling Firmware Update To cancel a firmware update right click the unit s icon in the Map V
5. button on the front keypad 3 When turned on the LCD will display Hello followed by the logger model part number firmware version and finally Stop 4 When first detected by the DataSuite software the logger icon will appear in the Map View If the logger icon does not appear from the DataSuite main menu go to Devices gt Detect Device File DataNet Network Tools Devices Analysis Report Help a ea 40 0 L AOLE Figure 52 Adding data logger icon to Map View 123 T FOURTEC Note If the logger is not recognized by the software try connecting the mini USB cable to another USB port on the PC Ensure the unit is turned on and select Devices gt Detect Device again in the main menu 5 Should you disconnect the logger s USB cable the logger icon will be grayed out ss Note You can move the logger icon elsewhere on the screen by going to Tools gt Lock Map View and unselecting this option 12 4 Loading Map View Background Load an image into the DataSuite software showing a map of your facility in order to place the Logger icons in their relative positions As you deploy more standalone loggers this will prove very helpful e Double click the Map View background to browse to the image directory and load the image Remember to unlock the Map View in order to move the icons around e Right click the Map View background and two options will be available Load Wallpaper and Reset Wallpaper which reset
6. 12 5 Configuring the Logger 111 111 112 112 113 113 114 114 114 115 115 115 116 116 116 117 117 117 117 117 118 118 119 119 119 121 122 122 122 123 124 124 12 6 Viewing Data 12 6 1 Online Data Views 12 6 2 Logger Tooltip 12 6 3 Sensor View 12 7 Downloading Data CHAPTER 13 MICROLOGPRO II HARDWARE OVERVIEW 13 1 Data Logger Front Panel Layout 13 2 Data Logger External Connections 13 3 Data Logger Sensor Overview 13 3 1 13 3 2 13 3 3 13 3 4 13 3 5 Internal Sensor Types External Sensor Types User Defined Sensors Sensor Alarms Sensor Calibration 13 4 Unit Serial Number and Comment 13 5 Power Supply 13 5 1 Battery Level Indication 13 5 2 Battery Life 13 5 3 Replacing the Battery 13 6 USB Communication Cable 13 7 LCD Overview 13 7 1 LCD Status Messages 13 7 2 LCD Mode of Operation 13 8 LED Overview 13 9 Operating the MicroLogPRO Il 14 1 13 9 1 13 9 2 13 9 3 13 9 4 13 9 5 13 9 6 13 9 7 MicroLogPRO II Operating Modes Turning on the Unit Logger Sleep Mode Viewing Real time Data on LCD Viewing Firmware Version Displaying Minimum and Maximum Values sensor Alarm Levels CHAPTER 14 PICOLITE OVERVIEW PicoLite Introduction 14 2 PicoLite Packaging CHAPTER 15 PICOLITE IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE 15 1 Pre setup Requirements 15 2 Launching the Software 15 3 Connecting the Logger 126 126 127 127 128 129
7. 129 132 132 133 133 134 134 134 134 138 138 139 140 140 140 141 15 4 Loading Map View Background 15 5 Configuring the Logger 15 6 Viewing Data 15 6 1 Online Data Views 15 6 2 Logger Tooltip 15 6 3 Sensor View 15 7 Downloading Data CHAPTER 16 PICOLITE HARDWARE OVERVIEW 16 1 Data Logger Layout 16 2 PicoLite Sensor Overview 16 2 1 Sensor Calibration 16 3 Unit Serial Number and Comment 16 4 PicoLite Battery 16 5 USB Connection 16 6 Operating the PicoLite 16 6 1 16 6 2 16 6 3 16 6 4 16 6 5 16 6 6 PicoLite Working Modes Turning on the Unit Viewing Firmware Version Sensor Alarm Levels Push Button Functionality Overview LED Functionality Overview 16 6 7 Marking Time Stamps CHAPTER 17 USING THE DATASUITE SOFTWARE 17 1 Installing DataSuite Software 17 1 1 System Requirements 17 1 2 Language Support 17 1 3 Working with User Accounts 17 1 4 Installation Procedure 17 2 DataSuite Software Activation 17 2 1 Software Activation Process 17 3 DataSuite CFR Module Activation and Login 17 4 System Password 17 5 DataSuite Software Layout 17 5 1 A082 17 5 3 Map View Sensor View History View Data Map DataSuite Toolbar Icons Map View Icons Graph Lower Toolbar Icons Data Map Icons 141 142 143 143 144 145 145 146 146 146 146 146 146 147 147 147 148 148 148 148 148 149 150 150 150
8. DataSuite CFR Login with no User ID In the event that the CFR module trial period has been started and a user ID is not available click the Suspend Trial button in the CFR Login window The CFR validation window will open up Select the Suspend trial period option DataSuite will then restart in a non CFR environment The number of trial days remaining is suspended Once DatPass is installed and a user ID is created you can always return to the CFR validation window and click Resume trial period to restart DataSuite and login to the CFR environment 17 4 System Password Throughout the software you will be required to enter a password to perform certain functions such as calibration or firmware update Note The default password is 1234 To change the password 1 Inthe Password dialog box click Change Password to open the Change Password dialog box 2 Enter the current password in the Current Password text box 3 Enter the new password in the New Password text box 4 Enter the new password a second time in the Confirm New Password text box to confirm your new password 5 Click OK Note The password must include at least 4 characters and is case sensitive 17 5 DataSuite Software Layout This section provides an overview of the default DataSuite window view as well as a guide to all of the icons available throughout the software The most commonly used tools and commands are displayed on two toolbars Tools that re
9. F Cyclic Run F Timer Run Push to run Sampling Rate Interval 00 01 Recording time 11 02 40 00 cays Setup amp Run Setup Figure 91 PicoLite Properties tab Properties Tab Comment This is the name of the logger and supports up to 15 characters It is advisable to name the logger according to the location in the facility Note The Comment field in the software supports all standard alphanumeric characters except for the following amp Temperature Scale Toggle between C and F This applies to the readings displayed on the logger LCD as well as in the software Options e Cyclic Run Select to enable the logger memory to continue running in cyclic mode whereby the logger will not stop once the memory capacity is reached but will erase the first samples in memory If this option is left unchecked the logger will stop when the memory is full e Push to Run Select to enable logger activation via the device button by pressing the button for at least three seconds e Timer Run Select the time at which the logger should start running Until that time the logger will remain in standby mode 215 FOURTEC Sampling Rate Sampling rate is one sample per minute to one sample per 18 hours Recording Time This field displays the length of time the logger memory will be able to record for depending upon the sampling rate Setup and Run Clicking Setup and Ru
10. FOURTEC 1 Click the Alarm Reason icon to open the Update Alarm Reason dialog any e Update Alarm Reason a Alarm Level 2012 03 14 09 55 22 S N 800351 intemal Digital Temperature High 22 55C Reason Figure 92 Update Alarm Reason dialog 2 Select the relevant alarm from the drop down menu and enter the reason in the text box 3 Click OK when finishing entering all alarm reason The Alarm reason icon will now be disabled _ 4 The alarm reasons will be updated in the DatPass database and will appear in the DatPass Audit Trail 17 19 Alarm Notifications Setup Once you have completed the logger alarm setup you can configure DataSuite to send alarm notifications via Email or SMS From the Tools menu select one of the following options depending on the type of notifications required e Email Alarm Notification e SMS Alarm Notification Or click the Email or SMS os icons located in the upper toolbar in order to launch the notification dialog Note To enable sending of Email or SMS first define the Email and SMS settings in the Tools gt Options dialog Connect a GSM modem to the PC if sending SMS s Refer to section 17 9 on page 173 for more details You may manage your contact list of alarm notification recipients from either the Manage Contacts menu item in the Tools menu or from within the Alarm Notification dialog itself As the Email and SMS Alarm Notifications must be defin
11. If the sensor breached any of the predefined alarm levels then the alarm symbol will be displayed alongside the data reading For example The logger display alarm symbols are e AL HI Alarm High e AL Lo Alarm Low e AL P H Pre Alarm High e AL P L Pre Alarm Low Status Menu Oo The Status menu contains the following sub menus all reachable by using the Scroll button The sub menus are outlined below in the order in which they appear on the logger display Name and Status As explained previously the unit name or Comment is displayed on the first row and the second row indicates the logger status If the logger is running then the following screen is displayed 95 f FOURTEC Fourtec DaqLink Logger running Batt Level battery level If the power adapter is not connected the battery percentage will be displayed If the power adapter is connected External power will be displayed Batt Level 67 Batt Level External power Logger Version This menu informs the user of the logger firmware version This is helpful when you need to upgrade the system firmware to check the current version Or when contacting Fourtec technical support with any technical issues Logger version 2 03 00 01 98 00 The firmware version is commonly referred to by the numbers in bold in the screen above For example the firmware version which is supported by this user guide is v1 98 S N This menu displays the
12. Internal Temperature Internal Humidity _Setup and Run Setup Only Close Figure 89 DataNet and DagLink Alarm Setup tab Alarm Delay and Pre alarm Delay The time until the alarm or pre alarm is activated You may not want to have the alarm sound immediately after the alarm level is breached as you are only interested in a condition where the alarm level lasted a certain amount of time For example if monitoring change of temperature in a freezer you would only be interested in a High alarm which lasted more than one minute as anything else could just be caused by the freezer door opening for a few seconds as opposed to a power failure leading to rise in temperature 209 FOURTEC Alarm Duration The duration of the alarm that is set off by one or more sensors breaching the alarm level Sound Alarm during Pre alarm You also have the option to sound the alarm in the software during a pre alarm scenario not just for a standard alarm Once you have configured your alarms you may return to the Device Setup tab or click one of the Setup buttons at the bottom of the tab 17 17 4 MicroLite amp MicroLogPRO II Setup Window The MicroLite and MicroLogPRO II Setup window include the following tabs Properties Sensors Display for MicroLite Power Saving Settings for MicroLogPRO Il and Boomerang Report They contain many of the same parameters for both products although some parameters are prod
13. Mini USB cable The mini USB cable connects the data logger to the PC for logger configuration and data download and is supplied with the DataSuite software kit 12 2 Launching the Software 1 Install the DataSuite software on the PC workstation Refer to section 17 1 Installing DataSuite Software on page 150 for more details 2 Once the software and associated components have been installed launch ra DataSuite from your DataSuite desktop shortcut 3 The main DataSuite window is launched The default view is called Map View 122 ve Otte T S uI u Pe Dedie b Ae Aey Aot et CARA E o ewner se brote 4 Check for DataSuite updates Go to Help gt Check for Updates from the DataSuite main menu to check for newer versions of the MicroLogPRO II module software and firmware released since you purchased your system For more details on the Update feature go to Chapter 18 Updating DataSuite Software and Firmware 12 3 Connecting the Logger Note Multiple MicroLogPRO II loggers may be detected by the PC at atime 1 Only once the DataSuite software has been installed connect the MicroLogPRO II data logger to the mini USB cable Connect this cable to the computer 2 Assuming this is the first time the logger is used following purchase it will be in deep sleep mode When connected to the PC the logger will automatically turn on To turn on the logger when disconnected from the PC press the Min Max Hours
14. to confirm the update Click Yes 4 The firmware will begin updating and you can monitor its progress in the unit s tooltip EC8O0 Seral Number 7005697 fourtec Battery Level 100 Version 1 0 1 00 Receiver Serial Number 777005 Network 16 250 124 Version 3 0 1 08 Command Queue Progress 14 1 Upload Firmware File 2 Update Firmware Firmware upload in progress 234 18 2 4 DataNet Firmware Update via USB All DataNet units with USB port can also be updated via direct USB to PC connection Follow the instructions below DNR9OO Receiver 1 Connect the DNR900 to the computer via USB Go to Devices gt Detect Device in the DataSuite main menu Right click on the Receiver icon KS and select Update Firmware from the context menu Enter the password in the Password dialog box A DataSuite system message will prompt you to confirm the update Click Yes 5 The firmware will begin updating and you can monitor its progress in the unit s tooltip Receiver DNASOO Serial Number 912708 Network 23 40 211 Yersion 3 1 2 2 Command Queue Progress 58 1 Upload Firmware File 2 Update Firmware 253 FOURTEC DNR9OO Repeater 1 Make sure the DNR900 is in Repeater mode and joined to an existing network When connected to the computer via USB go to Devices gt Detect Device in the DataSuite main menu 2 Right click on the Repeater icon tal and select Update Firmware from the context menu
15. 187 FOURTEC 17 16 2 Printing the Map View To print the Map View go to File gt Print Map View This will also print the icon name tags and network paths if enabled The Map View maintains its aspect ratio when printed 17 16 3 Displaying Icon Name Tags You can display a name tag for each device on the Map View The name tag consists of the unit Comment as defined in the unit Setup To toggle this feature right click on the Map View backoround and select Display All Units Name When this feature is enabled clicking the unit icon will also highlight the name tag in red 17 16 4 Moving Icons around the Screen Go to Tools gt Lock Map View and ensure this menu item is not selected in order to freely move the unit icons around the screen When you have finished placing the icons into position you may then lock the Map View so as not to mistakenly place an icon out of position 17 16 5 DataNet Multiple Network Connections DataSuite supports connection of more than one DataNet Receiver simultaneously This means that you are able to manage multiple DataNet networks from one DataSuite interface With a Map View featuring many device icons to identify which network each device belongs to each device tooltip includes the network name and unique ID In addition when scrolling over the Receiver icon with the mouse all devices associated to that Receiver s network is highlighted by a green frame Network Name Data
16. Internal Temperature Accuracy Temperature Resolution Internal Humidity Accuracy Internal Humidity Resolution External Sensor Accuracy External Sensor Resolution Memory Capacity Sampling Rate LCD Dew Point LED PC Connection Infrared Printout Power Supply Battery Life Dimensions Weight Wall Mount Standards Compliance EC800 EC850 Temp Temp 40 to 80 C 40 to 80 C RH 5 to 95 0 3 C 0 to 60 C 0 3 C 0 3 C 40 to 0 C and 60 to 80 C after calibration only 0 02 C 0 015 C or better N A 2 N A 0 05 NTC Temperature 0 3 C 4 20 mA 20 uA 0 10 V 5 mV NTC Temperature 0 03 C 4 20 mA 1 uA display 4 0 A software 0 10 V 1 mV display 4 0 mV software 52 000 Samples over 3 channels Minimum Once every second Maximum Once every 18 hours Four digits 7 segment LCD with decimal point LCD and Software indication Bi color Alarm Mini USB N A 2 3 AA 3 6V Lithium battery 2 years depending on sampling rate and operating conditions Diameter 72 mm Thickness 22 9 mm 55g Cradle accessory CE IP65 CE IP54 26 7 T FOURTEC 18 1 External Sensor Specifications MicroLogPRO II External Sensors Sensor Type NTC Temperature Voltage Adapter Current Adapter SENSOrWINY 190 DT140 ML2 DT139 mm probe DT132N 2 5 m cable length DT093 8 m cable length Range 50 to 110 C Oto 10 V O to 20 mA Accuracy 0 3 C 5 mV 20 uA Resolution 0 03 C 1 mV display 1
17. Note Only use adapters provided by Fourtec Use of the wrong adapter could damage your DagLink units If the loggers will run from the battery supply make sure to first charge each of the loggers for 16 hours before use in order maximize the battery life A fully charged battery can last several months depending on your logger configuration If the loggers will run from the AC power supply when first connected to the AC adapter the logger will always initiate the 16 hour charge cycle However if you reconnect the AC charger within one hour of disconnection from the unit the logger will not start a new 16 hour charging cycle as long as battery level is at least 90 Note For loggers measuring data with the internal temperature sensor it is critical to note that during the charge cycle the logger will heat up thereby causing the internal temperature sensor reading to rise up to 10 C above ambient temperature Once the charging process is complete the logger will cool down and the internal temperature sensor readings will return to normal For loggers remaining connected to AC power to prevent the logger from heating up again following the initial charge cycle the logger will receive a one minute trickle charge each day rather than stay continually charged This is sufficient to ensure the logger doesnt self discharge and will maintain the loggers full charge status 6 5 Loading Map View Background Load an image into the DataS
18. You can also enable this feature for specific loggers by opening the context menu on the Logger icon in Map View and selecting Show Network Paths 17 7 2 Refresh All Network Connections Use this feature to send a command to all Receivers to re establish connection to the end units in its specific network This is useful when wanting to ensure the network connectivity is performing optimally without any delay or lag due to changes in environmental conditions or location of the end units Such delays can explain logger 170 T FOURTEC icons not displaying the correct information or commands not being sent promptly to the end units Note The software automatically refreshes the network connections every 10 minutes 17 8 Tools Menu Items 17 8 1 Define Sensor DataSuite enables the user to define custom sensors This is a useful tool for when the data logger is communicating with many sensor types from different vendors Any additional sensor that you would like to connect to the logger must comply with the following restrictions The sensor s output must be either voltage in the range of 0 to 1 V 0 to 50 mV current in the range of 4 to 20 mA or Pulse in the range of 0 to 65535 pulses 1 Click Tools gt Define New Sensor and the Define New Sensor dialog will open To New Sensor Sensor Properties Sensor name New Sensor Sensor unit Base sensor Voltage 0 1 V v Decimal digits Define Values Output Va
19. 4 9 6 Power Adapter 4 9 7 Data Logger Battery Life 4 10 USB Communication Cable 4 11 DataNet Keypad Overview 4 11 1 DNL910 DNL920 and DNR900 Keypad 4 11 2 DNL8XX and DNL8XX BXT Keypad 4 12 Operating the DNL910 and DNL920 4 12 1 Turning on the Unit 4 12 2 Display Shutdown 4 12 3 Joining a Network 4 12 4 Main Menu Options 4 12 5 Additional Logger Screens 4 13 Operating the Mini DataNet DNL8XX DNL8XX BXT and DNR800 4 13 1 Turning Mini DataNet Units Off 4 13 2 Turning Mini DataNet Units On and Joining a Network 4 13 3 Rescanning for Networks 4 13 4 Leave Network 4 13 5 Running Signal Test 4 13 6 Call Unit from Software 4 14 Operating the DNR900 in Receiver Mode 4 14 1 Turning on the Unit 4 14 2 Receiver Menus 4 14 3 Changing Receiver to Repeater 4 14 4 Additional Receiver Screens 4 15 Operating the DNR900 in Repeater Mode 4 15 1 Turning on the Unit 4 15 2 Display Shutdown 4 15 3 Joining a Network 4 15 4 Menu Options 4 15 5 Additional Repeater Screens 4 15 6 Working in Substitute Receiver Mode 4 16 Data Logger Memory Management CHAPTER 5 DAQLINK OVERVIEW 5 1 DaqLink Introduction 5 2 The DagLink System 5 2 1 The Data Logger 5 2 2 Hardware Accessories CHAPTER 6 DAQLINK IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE 6 1 Pre setup Requirements 6 2 Launching the Software 6 3 Connecting the Logger 6 4 Charging DaqLink Loggers 6 5 Loading Map View Background 6 6 Configuring the Logger 6 7 Viewing Data 6
20. DNL910 e PT 100 Temperature DNL920 e Digital Temperature e Digital Relative Humidity Internal Inputs None Internal Inputs None Internal Inputs Digital Temperature Digital Humidity External Power Excitation transducers usage 12 VDC 300 mA Reset fuse overload protection 206 18 4 f FOURTEC DNL920 and PA models Internal PT 100 Temperature DNL910 Type PT 100 Range 20 to 50 C Resolution 0 1 C Accuracy 0 3 C Temperature Thermocouple J Range 200 to 1 000 C Resolution 0 1 C Accuracy 200 to 60 C 0 5 60 to 1 000 C 0 5 60 to 60 C 0 5 C Cold junction compensation 0 3 C Temperature PT 100 2 wire Range 200 to 400 C Resolution 0 1 C Accuracy 200 to 60 C 0 5 60 to 400 C 0 5 60 to 60 C 0 3 C 4to20mA Range 4 to 20 mA Resolution 47 6 pA Accuracy 0 5 Loop impedance 21 Q Contact Range Open Close Internal Digital Temperature DNL920 Type Digital sensor Range 20 to 50 C Resolution 0 1 C Accuracy 0 5 C Temperature Thermocouple K Range 200 to 1 000 C Resolution 0 1 C Accuracy 200 to 60 C 0 5 60 to 1 000 C 0 5 60 to 60 C 0 5 C Cold junction compensation 0 3 C Pulse Counter Input 4 only Range 1 to 65 536 counts Resolution 1 count Frequency range 0 to 4 KHz Input signal 0 to 3 2 V Input impedance 470 Q Oto1V Range 0 to
21. E Mail Settings SMS Settings Data Settings V Download data on application startup J Generate and send Boomerang reports automatically Alarm Settings Email SMS Reception Alarm Delay hh mm 00 05 Email SMS Offline Receiver Delay hh mm 00 05 175 FOURTEC Download data on application startup Select this checkbox if you want to have automatic download of data when the DataSuite software is launched If there are many loggers in the system with fast sampling rates then the download could burden the network Therefore in some cases disabled this feature is advised Generate and send Boomerang reports automatically Select this checkbox to enable the Boomerang feature to run automatically when a Boomerang enabled logger is connected to the computer By default this option is enabled so that the PDF data report is generated and Emailed as soon as the logger is detected by the DataSuite software Email SMS DataNet Offline Receiver and Reception Alarm Delay To prevent alarm notifications being sent unnecessarily for DataNet units which momentarily get disconnected from the network the user can define an alarm delay for Email and SMS notifications The RF environment as well as the network behavior are very dynamic and can result in very brief instances of units going offline In addition if the Receiver USB cable is disconnected or the unit is turned off for any reason and therefore the USB conne
22. Firmware 6 3 Connecting the Logger Note Multiple DagLink loggers may be detected by the PC at a time 1 Only once the DataSuite software and USB driver have been installed connect the DagLink data logger DBSA710 or DBSA720 to the Fourtec supplied power adapter Note Only use adapters provided by Fourtec Use of the wrong adapter could damage your DagLink units 2 Turnon the unit by pressing the Scroll button on the front keypad The unit will beep when turned on 3 Connect the mini USB cable to the computer and to the data logger s mini USB port 4 From the DataSuite main menu go to Devices gt Detect Device The data logger icon will appear in the Map View indicating that the logger is detected g DataSuite File DataNet Network Tools Devices Analysis Report Help RETESET TOUET Figure 32 Adding data logger icon to Map View 80 f FOURTEC Note If the logger is not recognized by the software try connecting the mini USB cable to another USB port on the PC Or select Devices gt Detect Device again in the main menu 5 Should you disconnect the logger s USB cable or power adapter and the battery N gt eventually dies the logger icon will be grayed out S Note You can move the logger icon elsewhere on the screen by going to Tools gt Lock Map View and unselecting this option 6 4 Charging DaqLink Loggers This section refers to charging the DBSA710 or DBSA720 loggers
23. Internal Humidity Sensor Type Custom Sensor Name Input 1 PT 100 PT 100 F Input 2 PT 100 PT 100 F Input 3 PT 100 PT 100 F Input 4 Frequency Frequency Setup and Run Setup Only Close Figure 88 DagLink Device Setup tab Comment This is the name of the logger It is advisable to name the logger according to the location in the facility Note The Comment field in the software and on the logger display supports all standard alphanumeric characters except for the following amp 206 f FOURTEC Sampling Rate Sampling rate is one sample per second to one sample per 18 hours However there are programming limitations you must be aware of when configuring the loggers The sampling rate will vary depending on the number and type of sensors you setup Refer to section 7 3 5 on page 89 Memory State From the drop down menu you have the following options e Online Mode For working with logger connected to PC Data will be transmitted in real time i e at the same time as the sampling rate e Optimized Memory Mode For working with the logger as a standalone device not connected to the PC In this mode the memory is more efficiently managed as the data does not need to be transmitted together with the sampling rate Use the Transmissions interval parameter in the Setup window to see the rate at which the data will be displayed on the logger or in the software Note If used when
24. SMS Settings Minimize application to system tray F Run application on windows startup Map View background Stretch Center Set number of decimal places for Intemal Temperature to 2 Date format dd MMay v Ignore regional settings when exporting to CSV Application data files path P C Users Public Yourtec Data Suite Data Files Browse Save text data files C Users Public fourtec Data Suite Tet Files Browse Path for Report files C Users Public fourtec Data Suite Reports Browse Default Paths will be used in case one or more of the paths above are not available C Users Public fourtec Data Suite i Caneel Figure 80 Options gt Preferences tab The Preferences tab includes the following options 173 FOURTEC Minimize application to system tray When this checkbox is selected the DataSuite icon will appear in the computer s system tray in the lower right of the screen when the application is minimized Simply double click the icon to maximize the application to full screen Run application on Windows Startup When this option is selected DataSuite will automatically launch upon Windows startup This feature is useful in the event where the computer unexpectedly resets and when it restarts DataSuite will launch and online monitoring of the connected devices will be able to continue Note If running Windows Vista User Account Control
25. Select the User Defined option choose the period and click Generate to manually generate the report according to the defined parameters 19 Use the Units pane to select which loggers should be included on the report itself a Select the All Units checkbox to include all network units b To include a specific selection of units unselect the All Units checkbox and manually select the checkbox for each unit c The order in which the units will appear on the report can be defined according to Serial Number by selecting By S N and clicking the S N header or manually by selecting Manual and clicking the Up and Down arrows d The definition of the report is now complete Click Save Profile and then Close to exit the Reports Profiles Manager A report will be generated at the defined time 17 24 2 Report Types Each report contains at least one Report Type with the data displayed in table format A description of each Report Type parameter in the Reports Profile Manager is provided below Alarm Log e Parameters include sensor name setup alarm parameters and setup time In addition each sensor alarm value is listed according to the relevant setup If there are other setups in the report time frame then additional setup tables and alarm tables will be displayed e Battery and Reception alarms will be listed after the sensor alarms 241 FOURTEC e fno alarms were recorded during the report time frame a No Alarm Events mes
26. The report contains numerous parameters such as data statistics data graph and histogram as well as the time date the report was issued and the time range of the report data The email includes the report PDF and indicates the logger Serial Number and the logger name which in this case is Fourtec DataSuiteBoomerang Report Logger 9137425 fourtec test gmail com Sent Thu 20 Oct 11 1 45 PM Ilan Citrin H Message PE Report 20 10 2011 13 44 55 pdf 48 KB Attached is a Boomerang Report sent from the DataSuite program containing data from logger fourtec with serial number 9137425 Please do not reply to this email The Boomerang report is similar in structure to a standard DataSuite report but only contains data from the specific logger 246 Report Cover Page example DataSuite Boomerang Report This report was issued by the fourtec DataSuite software The report was generated by FOURIER dancin Report profile name Boomerang Report Profile Report issue time and date 20 10 11 13 44 55 Report time range 20 10 11 13 42 50 20 10 11 13 44 33 Report Data Graph example f DataSuite Boomerang Report Sensor Graph Interna Input 20 10 11 13 42 50 20 10 11 13 44 53 Commertfourttec YN STIMIS 242 interne NIC TOK PD E esa 24 25 WEND WEND 210 17 tegen 0 10 17 13 48 53 End of Report 247 T FOURTEC Chapter 18 Updating DataSuite Software and Firmware
27. There is no LCD screen on the Mini DataNet models Ensure the device Serial Number has been added to the Mini DataNet Device Filter before continuing Refer to section 3 5 3 A useful tip for remembering the LED functionality is that a green LED indicates a logger turning on or joining a network and a red LED indicates a logger is shutting down or leaving a network 4 13 1 Turning Mini DataNet Units Off DNL8XX and DNL8XX BXT To conserve battery the Mini DataNet LED does not provide an indication of on off Status If you wish to operate the logger it is best to first be sure the unit is turned off before continuing Turning off the unit does not remove it from the network To turn the unit off 1 Press and hold the logger button until the LED emits a fixed red light for at least three seconds 2 Release the logger button DNR8SOO The DNR800 Mini Repeater is powered by external AC power supply only There is no battery backup When disconnected the unit is shutdown immediately and is disconnected from the network 4 13 2 Turning Mini DataNet Units On and Joining a Network DNL8XX and DNL8XX BXT The action of turning on a unit means that it will also try to join an existing network When the unit is off 1 Give the logger button a short press 2 The logger will search for a network The LED will blink green at one second intervals until either of the following two scenarios occurs The logger automatically find
28. UAC must be turned off for this feature to work If UAC is off then DataSuite will not launch on Windows startup Map View background Use this option to toggle between Stretch and Center views for the background image used in Map View Set number of decimal places for For each logger sensor internal or external you may choose to display the data in the software with a resolution of up to and including 4 decimal places Date format Choose between five date formats to be used throughout the software when displaying data e g in the Graph display Ignore regional settings when exporting to CSV Selecting this option will ensure that data will be corrected exported to a CSV file and will not use any custom regional settings in the Windows OS which might adversely affect the layout of the data in the CSV file Application data files path The default path for saving all data recorded by the data loggers is e Default path on WinXP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Fourtec DataSuite Data Files e Default path on Windows 7 C Users Public Fourtec DataSuite Data Files Click Browse to change this path e g to a network path Save text data files Select this checkbox if you would like DataSuite to also save the logger data to a text file This will allow you to export the data in csv format to another application that can display the logger data e Default path on WinXP C Documents and Setting
29. description of the specific shipment so the report recipient will Know which shipment or logger it is referring to 7 Select Display alarm levels on graph in order to display any defined low or high alarm levels on the report graph 8 To add the Boomerang report recipients click the Add Contacts button and select from the DataSuite contact list or use the Custom Email field to add emails on the fly 9 When complete use the buttons at the bottom of the window to continue with the logger setup 17 25 2 Boomerang Setup Destination Computer By default DataSuite version 1 01 36 and higher is already enabled to support generation and sending of Boomerang reports whenever a Boomerang enabled logger is connected to tt To disable Boomerang on a destination computer the computer where the logger will be connected during or post shipment go to Tools gt Options gt Device Settings and unselect the Generate and send Boomerang reports automatically checkbox In addition DataSuite version 1 01 36 and higher has a built in default email account so the user is not required to configure their own email account from where the Boomerang report is sent Of course the user may choose to do so if necessary 17 25 3 Boomerang Email and Report Examples The Boomerang data report is sent to the defined contacts by the destination computer as soon as the logger is detected by the software and as long as an Internet connection is available
30. just configured differently from the main menu when turned on Refer to section 4 14 3 to learn how to switch the DNRg00 unit type to Repeater The DNR800 only functions as a Repeater 3 8 5 Using Loggers as Repeaters You may also enable a DNL910 or DNL920 logger to operate as a Repeater in addition to its logging capabilities In this mode the logger is referred to as a Short Range Repeater SRR Furthermore the DNL910 PA and DNL920 PA units by default operate as both a logger and a Repeater and due to its built in power amplification have a long transmission range similar to the DNR9OO When in SRR mode the DNL910 and DNL920 loggers maintain the transmission range in accordance with its own specifications Therefore they will transmit at 4 dBm and the DNL910 PA and DNL920 PA will transmit at a greater range of 17 dBm To switch a logger to SRR mode simply right click the logger icon in the DataSuite software Map View and select Enable Short Range Repeater Mode 38 f FOURTEC Note Any device used as both a Logger Repeater must be connected to AC power at all times as the power consumption is much greater 3 9 Recommended Approach to Deploying DataNet Units Now that you have a general understanding of how the DataNet system functions you may wish to use Fourtec s recommended approach for initial deployment of the system This approach will ensure a smooth and efficient deployment of your DataNet units and you may the
31. or in smaller bundles depending on the order and reseller There are no accessories included in the package just the individual unit itself In order to save battery life the PicoLite s are shipped in Stop mode This means that before you can start sampling you must first connect the logger to the computer and configure it using the DataSuite software The shelf life of the battery is five years prior to first time use 139 FOURTEC Chapter 15 PicoLite Implementation Guide Fourtec recommends first time users of the PicoLite system read this chapter before drilling down into the many features of the system described later in the user guide The Implementation Guide will give you a clear understanding of the basic aspects of setting up the system and getting the data logger up and running 15 1 Pre setup Requirements Prior to commencing with the PicoLite implementation you must have the following requirements in place PC e 24 7 availability if online data monitoring is required e Internet connection for sending of data reports via email Boomerang feature e Reliable AC power e Sufficient hard disk space to store loggers data e One free USB port PicoLite devices At least one PicoLite logger 15 2 Launching the Software 1 Install the DataSuite software on the PC workstation Refer to section 17 1 Installing DataSuite Software on page 150 for more details 2 Once the software and associated compone
32. to stop the logger directly from the unit select the Stop on key press option in the logger Setup window in DataSuite While the logger is running place the magnet key in the magnet holder for at least 12 seconds The logger will then stop sampling A time stamp will also be recorded for this event and the T indication will display for 2 seconds The LCD will then display STOP e Run MicroLite is recording data It will stop recording automatically when its memory has reached full capacity 8 000 16 000 or 32 000 samples depending on the model When the memory is full the LCD displays FULL e Cyclic Run Similar to Run mode but MicroLite will continuously sample data recording over old data when the memory reaches its capacity beginning with the earliest data recording Cyclic Run mode must be selected from the logger Setup window in DataSuite e Timer Run MicroLite can be configured to start recording at a predetermined time When MicroLite is set for such a run its status is set to Timer Run The logger LCD displays tRUN e Push to Run MicroLite will only begin logging data when the user operates the logger s reed switch with the MicroLite magnet key The logger LCD displays PUSH 116 f FOURTEC 10 10 2 Turning on the Unit To turn on the unit from sleep mode the LCD and LED are both off simply connect the logger to the PC s USB port or place the magnet key in the magnet holder for MicroLite II only 10
33. will be able to complete the transmission of all its data and the software will be updated with this data The data recovery is all completed automatically and the user is not required to perform any specific actions Note In the Tools gt Option menu select the checkbox to enable automatic data download when the software is launched Otherwise you will have to perform manual download from the Logger context menu For Standalone Loggers For DagLink MicroLogPRO II and MicroLite loggers when the units are connected to the computer and detected by the DataSuite software they will automatically begin downloading data 183 FOURTEC lf they were already connected and streaming online data and the DataSuite software or computer was shutdown the units will continue to collect data Upon re detection by DataSuite data will again be downloaded ensuring full data recovery to the DataSuite database 17 13 Saving Data As soon as a logger starts to record data the software creates a data file to which it writes the logger data In Windows XP for example logger data files are stored in the following default location C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Fourtec DataSuite Data Files In Windows 7 the data files are stored here C Users Public Fourtec DataSuite A folder is created for each data logger and is named according to the logger Serial Number In this folder is stored the data files A file is created
34. 10 minutes until detected If the cap was connected during the 10 minute search cycle the logger will only detect the cap at the end of the 10 minute cycle when it is next schedule to perform a search 115 FOURTEC e After the cap is successfully detected and while the logger is still running it will continue to check that the cap is connected each time it records a new sample If no cap is detected then it won t record the sample and will again display NC 10 9 Using the MicroLite Magnet The MicroLite includes the magnet key accessory in the logger packaging This magnet is used to activate the logger when in Push to Run mode and for the MicroLite Il only activate the logger wake up the logger from deep sleep mode stop the logger and mark a time stamp There is a reed relay on the MicroLite s circuit board which is closed when placing the magnet in the magnet holder and depending on the duration will trigger a specific function 10 10 Operating the MicroLite This section explains how to operate the MicroLite loggers and provides an overview of the logger functionality 10 10 1 MicroLite Operating Modes MicroLite is always set in one of five possible operating modes These modes are all activated via the DataSuite software or using the magnet key e Stop MicroLite is idle and is not recording When stopping the logger immediately ceases to record data instead displaying STOP on the LCD For MicroLite II only
35. 17 dBm End Units per Receiver 65 000 22 FOURTEC Mini Repeater without LCD 7 b e Part Number DNR800 Repeater Transmission Range 20 dBm End Units per Receiver 65 000 2 4 3 Hardware Accessories The DataNet system includes the following accessories e Mini USB cable for connecting PC to DataNet Receiver e Power adapter to power DataNet Receiver Repeater and data loggers 2 4 4 DataSuite Software The user interface for the DataNet system the DataSuite software CD is provided together with the DataNet hardware and includes the following features e Multiple Network management e Data display management storage and data diagnostics e Alarm settings Email and SMS notifications visual and audible alarms e Reports module e Wireless sensor definition e Wireless sensor calibration e Wireless firmware update boot over the air e Data download via USB e Automatic software update via Fourtec server The DataSuite for DataNet module is run together with additional modules such as DagLink and MicroLogPRO II to allow multiple data view from multiple logger models within one graph view The software interface is described in detail in Chapter 17 Using the DataSuite Software 23 T FOURTEC Chapter 3 DataNet Implementation Guide Fourtec strongly recommends first time users of the DataNet system read this chapter before drilling down into the many features of the system described later in the user
36. 7 1 Online Data Views 6 7 2 Logger Tooltip 6 7 3 Sensor View 6 8 Downloading Data CHAPTER 7 DAQLINK HARDWARE OVERVIEW 7 1 Data Logger Front Panel Layout 7 1 1 DBSA710 and DBSA720 7 2 Data Logger External Connections 7 2 1 DBSA710 and DBSA720 7 3 Data Logger Sensor Overview 76 76 7 78 79 79 79 80 81 81 86 86 86 86 86 87 7 3 1 Internal Sensor Types 7 3 2 External Sensor Types 7 3 3 Sensor Connection 7 3 4 External PT 100 Sensor Connection 7 3 5 Programming Limitations for DBSA710 and DBSA720 7 3 6 External Alarm Output 7 3 7 Polarity 7 3 8 Frequency Pulse Counter 7 3 9 User Defined Sensors 7 3 10 Sensor Alarms 7 3 11 Sensor Calibration 7 4 Unit Serial Number and Comment 7 5 Power Supply 7 5 1 DBSA710 and DBSA720 Data Loggers 7 5 2 Power Adapter 7 9 3 Data Logger Battery Life 7 6 USB Communication Cable 7 7 _DaqLink Keypad Overview 7 7 1 DBSA710 and DBSA720 Keypad 7 8 Operating the DBSA710 and DBSA720 7 8 1 Turning on the Unit 7 8 2 Display Shutdown 7 8 3 Main Menu Options 7 8 4 Additional Logger Screens CHAPTER 8 MICROLITE OVERVIEW 8 1 MicroLite Introduction 8 2 MicroLite Packaging 8 2 1 The Data Logger 8 2 2 Hardware Accessories CHAPTER 9 MICROLITE IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE 9 1 Pre setup Requirements 9 2 Launching the Software 9 3 Connecting the Logger 9 4 Loading Map View Background 9 5 Configuri
37. FCC Rules Operation is Subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation DNL910 FCC ID XGO DNL9XX This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is Subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation DNR800 FCC ID XGO DNR8XX This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation DNL920 PA FCC ID XGO DNL9XX PA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation DNL808 FCC ID XGO DNL8XX This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is Subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interfe
38. From Stop Mode When the logger is in Stop mode pressing both buttons for two seconds will display the device s current firmware version F will be displayed on the LCD followed by the version number e g 2 00 From Run Mode When the logger is in Stop mode pressing both buttons for five seconds will display the device s current firmware version After two seconds the logger will take a time stamp and then three seconds later the firmware version will be displayed 136 FOURTEC 13 9 6 Displaying Minimum and Maximum Values You can display minimum and maximum values on the LCD screen ranging from the last 1 24 hours or from the last 1 30 days by using the MicroLogPRO II left and right buttons Viewing Min and Max Values in the last 1 24 Hours 1 Select the number of hours by pressing the right button on the logger keypad Don t release the button The LCD will then display the hour number ranging from 1 to 24 days It will scroll through the hours starting from H 1 H 2 and so on Once you ve reached the desired number release the right button 2 Once the right button is released the logger will display the Min and Max values of the sensors for the selected time period including Dew Point Viewing Min and Max Values for the last 1 30 Days 1 Select the number of days by pressing the left button on the logger keypad Do not release the button The LCD will then display the day number ranging from 1 to 30 days It w
39. Map View with Lock Map View selected the Map View icons are in a fixed position and can t be moved You must unselect this option in order to freely move the icons anywhere on the screen This is essential if working with a custom background image 17 8 4 Options Menu Refer to section 17 9 for more details 17 8 5 Manage Contacts The Manage Contacts dialog is where the user can add edit and remove all contacts and groups to which DataSuite Reports and Email SMS notifications are sent Refer to section 17 19 1 for more details regarding managing Contacts and to section 17 19 2 for more details regarding managing Groups 17 8 6 Email Alarm Notifications The Email Alarm Notifications dialog is where the user can configure all notifications to be sent via Email to a predefined contact list Refer to section 17 19 for details 17 8 7 SMS Alarm Notifications The SMS Alarm Notifications dialog is where the user can configure all notifications to be sent via SMS to a predefined contact list Refer to section 17 19 for details 172 f FOURTEC 17 8 8 Firmware Update Center The Firmware Update Center is where the device firmware updates are managed Please refer to section 18 2 for more details 17 9 Tools gt Options Menu Items The Options dialog is divided into four main tabs e Preferences e Device Settings e Email Settings e SMS Settings 17 9 1 Preferences Tab Options esm E Mail Settings
40. Minimum Mainum Statistics tert Statistics end samples gt mo kue hendig 20 BRT 1303 02 MR 13051271E z4 xoc ot kemal RH mp By 1303121838 130312 1835 z4 Figure 56 Online data Statistics view 12 6 2 Logger Tooltip Close the online data window and return to Map View Scroll over the Logger icon and you will see a tooltip displaying the relevant logger information including real time data EC850 Senal Number 7006164 Fourec Battery Level 100 Version 1 0 7 00 Last Sample Time 05 07 11 01 02 21 Internal Digital Temperature 30 51 C Internal AH 5 2 Figure 57 Logger tooltip This tool tip is updated with every newly recorded sample 12 6 3 Sensor View Click the Sensor View icon a in the tool bar to switch to this view Here you can monitor the data by viewing data display of each individual sensor rather than of each logger 127 F FOURTEC ee File DataNet Network Tools Devices Analysis Report Help a aa 0o eoBg cleiae Figure 58 Sensor view e lf the sensor is in alarm the sensor box will change color from green to red just as the Logger icon would e Double clicking the individual sensor box will open the data in the online Graph view 12 7 Downloading Data lf the logger is being used as a standalone device you will have to connect it to the computer via USB cable in order to download the data to the software 1 Connect logger to PC and go to Devices gt D
41. Sample without alarm The LED will flash green every ten seconds as long as the logger is in Run mode e Connected to USB The LED will permanently indicate green as long as the unit is connected to the computer via USB and in Stop mode e Turning on the unit The LED will flash orange for one second when it is turned on from sleep mode e Marking atime stamp The LED will flash green when a time stamp is marked as it is recording a new sample to the logger memory 13 9 Operating the MicroLogPRO II This section explains how to operate the MicroLogPRO II loggers and provides an overview of the logger functionality 13 9 1 MicroLogPRO II Operating Modes MicroLogPRO II features the following operating modes e Stop MicroLogPRO II is idle and is not sampling To stop the logger via the logger keypad itself when in Run or Timer Run modes select the Stop on key press option in the logger Setup window Pressing both left and right buttons together for 15 seconds will stop the logger A time stamp will also be recorded for this event and the T indication will display for 2 seconds The LCD will then display STOP e Run MicroLogPRO II is sampling data and recording to its internal memory It will stop recording automatically when its memory has reached full capacity 52 000 samples with one sensor When the memory is full the LCD displays FULL e Cyclic Run Similar to Run mode but the logger will record ove
42. Show All Network Paths in the DataSuite main menu the software will show the actual path that the system uses to communicate between Receiver and logger for all online networks and associated units For Specific Networks Right click on the Receiver icon and select Show Network Paths to see paths for a specific network For Specific Units You can also select Show Network Path from the logger context menu to display the individual path from the unit to the parent unit e g Receiver or Repeater E 7 e gi S Hf Figure 16 Showing network paths Example 1 37 7 F FOURTEC NE PIS a JH Ar Figure 17 Showing network paths Example 2 The screenshot above shows a system of three loggers red squares and two Repeaters blue circles transmitting to the Receiver The arrows show the path between the units Note that they are bi directional meaning that the system is a two way system with units both transmitting and receiving data e Agreen path indicates a strong signal e A yellow path indicate a medium strength signal e A red path indicates a weak signal 3 8 4 Adding Repeaters to the Network Loggers which aren t in range of the Receiver can transmit to the Receiver via a Repeater Short Range Repeater which is in range As DataNet is built using mesh networking technology Repeaters DNR800 or DNR900 can be added to the system to enhance the network range The DNR900 Receiver Repeater is the same device
43. While the logger is running double click the Logger icon in the Map View e While the logger is running open the logger context menu and select Display Data r J y L De Ae eT An tere Figure 86 Online data window The data displayed in this window is the data that was transmitted by the logger in the current software session Data transmitted during a previous session of the software being open will not be displayed For example when you setup the logger it creates a new online session This data can be viewed by opening archived data Refer to section 17 14 You may view the data in a graph or table by clicking the relevant tabs in the online data window While in either of these views the data is constantly being updated in real time in the respective view according to the transmission rate of the logger Note Users of Windows 7 using right to left language settings e g Hebrew may have problems viewing the Date Time in the DataSuite graph This is a known Microsoft bug Until a bug fix is released change the Regional Settings to English 17 15 1 Showing Hiding the Data Sets In the online graph display where you have data from only one logger displayed you can show or hide the individual sensor data by using the sensor labels at the bottom of the graph 186 FOURTEC 20 17 a 28 8 VLA ra Ar a Wag 04705708 02 45 36 Internal Digital Temperature a Int AH 55 762 k In the s
44. dd mm yy mm hh 17 9 4 SMS Settings Tab DataSuite s alarm notification feature enables sending of SMS s to notify the user of any alarm in the system First select the Send SMS notifications check box Using the SMS feature requires connection of a GSM modem and SIM card to the DataSuite PC or even just a cellular phone with an active SIM card You must select the COM port which the GSM modem cellular phone is connected to in order for the software to detect it Note When using a cellular phone as a modem ensure that the PC software suite is disabled before connecting the phone to the PC com port Otherwise the com port will not be available for the DataSuite software Once the configuration is complete DataSuite will be able to send SMS s to predefined SMS contacts when your loggers have breached certain alarm levels Refer to section 17 17 2 for setting Alarm levels on the logger and to section O for managing the SMS alarm notifications Options Preferences Device Settings E Mail Settings SMS Settings 7 Send SMS notifications GSM Connection Settings COM port Baud rate Timeout ms Unlock SIM Card Use PIN code Figure 82 Options gt SMS Settings tab 178 f FOURTEC Note Once the GSM modem is online you will see the green GSM icon l _ appear in the DataSuite upper toolbar Sending a Test SMS To send a test SMS to verify the SMS configuration is co
45. extend the range and improve its robustness Each such device has end units communicating with it but this route may change as the RF environment changes This is the ZigBee self correcting mechanism at play 24 T FOURTEC ol h Afh Afk Figure 4 DataNet network with Short Range Repeaters 3 2 Pre setup Requirements Prior to commencing with the DataNet implementation you must have the following requirements in place PC e 24 7 availability e Reliable AC power e Sufficient hard disk space to store loggers data e One free USB port DataNet devices e One DNR900 DataNet Receiver e Atleast one DataNet logger DNL910 DNL920 DNL910 PA DNL920 PA or Mini DataNet logger DNL804 DNL808 or DNL810 or BXT models 25 f FOURTEC At least one DNR900 DataNet Repeater or DNR800 Mini Repeater depending on your RF environment Mini USB cable The mini USB cable connects the DNR900 Receiver to the PC and is supplied with the PC Suite software kit 3 3 Launching the Software 1 2 Install the DataSuite software on the PC workstation Refer to section 17 1 Installing DataSuite Software on page 150 for more details Once the software and associated components have been installed launch hewwpatelay DataSuite from your DataSuite desktop shortcut Reise Blais Software activation window will open Select the DataNet module button To start the 30 day Trial version select the Sta
46. f FOURTEC 4 6 DNR9OO Receiver Repeater External Connections Mini USB port 12 V power socket Negative Center External Alarm Figure 27 Receiver Repeater external connections Mini USB Port To connect Receiver to PC and be detected by DataSuite software Connect the mini USB Type B plug rectangle plug of the supplied USB communication cable to the Receiver and the USB Type A plug flat plug to the computer Refer to section 4 10 12 V Power Socket To connect unit to external power supply Plug in an AC DC 9 12 V adaptor to power the unit To use as a Receiver or Repeater and maintain network integrity the unit should be powered at all times Connecting external power to the unit automatically charges the internal back up battery The adaptor should meet the required specifications Refer to Appendix A DataNet Specifications External Alarm Connect external alarm e g siren audible alarm to this input Whenever a logger on the network is in alarm status the external alarm will be activated Refer to section 4 7 6 for more details 4 7 Data Logger Sensor Overview This section provides an overview of the hardware specifications of the DataNet data loggers 4 7 1 Internal Sensor Types The DNL810 DNL910 DNL920 DNL910 PA and DNL920 PA loggers include internal sensors depending on the logger model Measurement Accuracy Logger Model Range Digital Humidity 5 to 95 3 in DataSuite DNL920 softwar
47. for 16 hours before using them for the first time When connected to external power supply the data logger battery will not be charged when the unit is turned off This will allow the system to protect the battery from overheating First Time Charging From a fully drained battery you must charge the battery for 16 hours to bring it to a full charge Once the charge cycle is complete the logger will run from the external power supply without draining or charging the internal battery In order to maintain a fully charged battery and ensure the battery doesn t self discharge the battery charger will daily charge the unit for one minute to maintain the battery capacity Note Before storing the DagLink units make sure you have unplugged all the sensors and turned the units off via the keypad Standard Charging Whenever a logger is reconnected to the charger it will begin the 16 hour charge cycle no matter what the status of the battery Once the charging cycle is complete the logger will run from external power supply However if you reconnect the AC charger within one hour of disconnection from the unit the logger will not start a new 16 hour charging cycle as long as battery level is at least 90 Effect of Charging Battery on Temperature Sensor For loggers measuring data with the internal temperature sensor it is critical to note that during the charge cycle the logger will heat up thereby causing the internal temperature senso
48. guide The Implementation Guide will give you a clear understanding of the basic aspects of setting up the system and getting your network up and running Once you are familiar with the technical aspects of setting up the network as outlined in this chapter please consult section 3 8 for Fourtec s recommended approach to initial deployment of the DataNet system Example Below is a diagram depicting a supermarket deployment of a DataNet system illustrating how the devices may be positioned to provide full coverage within the facility y y 8 gt Y 7 7 sP 7 a 7 fs a i E Cem K 7 Figure 2 Example of DataNet network application 3 1 DataNet Network Architecture The DataNet network architecture consists of layers of loggers and Repeaters forming a mesh network monitored by the Receiver unit connected to the workstation PC The basic architecture is as follows e Maximum nodes per network 65 000 e DNR900 Receiver recognizes up to 8 loggers and 16 Repeaters e DNR900 Repeater and DNR800 Mini Repeater recognizes up to 24 loggers and 16 Repeaters including parent unit e DNL910 and DNL920 including the PA models in Short Range Repeater mode refer to section 3 8 5 recognizes up to 24 loggers and 16 Repeaters The diagrams below show the architecture of a typical DataNet mesh network Repeaters and loggers which are being used as Short Range Repeaters in Figure 4 see section can be added to the network in order to
49. has been made in order to ensure that the user can always restore default values that were tested and are within spec 17 21 Analyzing the Data When in offline History View or online data displays you have a number of features for analyzing the on screen data The features for analyzing data while in the graph display are practically the same when in offline or online mode 17 21 1 Using the Graph Features The following section explains how to use the numerous graph analysis features including an overview of the graph toolbar options Please first refer to section 17 5 5 DataSuite Toolbar Icons for a full overview of the graph toolbar Autoscaling Click Autoscale on the graph toolbar to view the full data display thereby restoring the axis range to its default settings Zooming To zoom in to a specific area of the graph 1 Click Zoom in Q on the graph toolbar 2 Drag the cursor diagonally to select the area you want to magnify Release the mouse button to zoom in to the selected area 3 Click Zoom in Q a second time to disable the zoom tool 4 Click Autoscale to restore the default display 232 FOURTEC Panning Use the Pan tool gt to pan along the x or y axis or after Zooming in to see any part of the graph that is outside the zoomed area 1 Click Pan a L on the graph toolbar then click anywhere on the graph and drag the mouse to view another area 2 Click the Pan icon a second time to disa
50. in the office or vice versa Vacation You can define when the contact is on vacation so they won t receive any notifications over this period Number of SMS resends The number of times DataSuite will send follow up SMS s with the alarm notification The maximum is nine resends per alarm The gap between each resend is five minutes Note In order to stop receiving SMS resends you can simply send an SMS with OK in the message body to the GSM SIM card s phone number 3 When the contact details have been entered click OK 4 The contact will be added to the Contacts tab You may choose to add another contact edit an existing contact or remove a contact from the list 17 19 2 Groups Tab 1 Click the Groups tab and then click Add Group The Group Details dialog will open d Group Detads Figure 94 Adding a group 2 Enter a Group name and add your existing contacts to the group by selecting the checkbox next to the Contact name 3 Click OK to create the Group In the Groups tab you may choose to add a group edit an existing group or remove a group from the list 222 1 f FOURTEC 17 19 3 Notifications Setup Tab Once the contacts have been created you may start defining which contacts should receive the alarm notifications The pane on the left hand side of the Notifications Setup tab displays all the units loggers or DataNet Repeaters and their serial numbers which have been confi
51. is measured every hour and recorded to the logger memory When reconnected to USB DataSuite takes the last battery reading recorded to memory Recognizing when MicroLite Battery needs Replacing If the MicroLite LCD shuts off immediately upon PC disconnection this means that the logger battery must be replaced The logger is powered via USB when connected to the PC so the LCD will always turn on even if the battery is empty or missing The DataSuite software does not take a measurement of the battery voltage when the logger is connected to the USB so it will not provide indication that the battery is actually 0 Note Following firmware upgrade from v0 95 to v1 01 the battery reading in DataSuite will be viewed as NA until the device is removed from the USB and reconnected to the PC The correct battery reading will then be displayed 10 4 2 Battery Life In optimal conditions the battery s maximum lifespan can range from between one to two years The MicroLite is able to conserve battery life by placing itself in sleep mode between data recordings While in sleep mode the data logger consumes a 112 FOURTEC minimal amount of power The MicroLite will then wake up for a few micro seconds whenever it has to record a data sample or display new data on the LCD screen You always have the option of disabling the LCD during logging only to turn on during alarm state Refer to section 17 17 4 for more details In addition you
52. is the ability to configure alarm levels into the loggers so any breach of these levels is recorded on the data logger and monitored by the software if the unit is connected via USB The user may be notified of these alarms via Email SMS audible and visual indicators Setup for EC350 7007900 Properties Nam Contgurston lan dela Sensor _orviguration J internal Digtd Tergerctee Alam 1 Stema NIL ELDx RZ 212 FOURTEC Alarm Delay The time until the alarm is activated You may not want to have the alarm sound immediately after the alarm level is breached as you are only interested in a condition where the alarm level lasted a certain amount of time For example if monitoring change of temperature in a freezer you would only be interested in a High alarm which lasted more than one minute as anything else could just be caused by the freezer door opening for a few seconds as opposed to a power failure leading to rise in temperature Sensor Configuration Select the relevant checkbox to configure the logger internal and or external sensors to be used for measurement To enable Dew Point measurement on the EC850 or MicroLite II RH model you must select both the internal Temperature and Humidity checkboxes After selecting one or more of the sensor checkboxes the Alarm checkbox is enabled Enter the minimum and maximum alarm levels dependent on your specific thresholds Sensor Configuration Internal Digi
53. level may be low but the link quality can still be 100 You will not be able to run the Signal Level test when the logger has lost its connection to the network If you tried then the following screens are displayed No Parent signal Fourtec DataNet No Parent found Firmware Version This menu informs the user of the logger firmware version This is helpful when you need to upgrade the system firmware to check the current version Or when contacting Fourtec technical support with any technical issues Firmware version 2 03 04 02 30 00 The firmware version is commonly referred to by the numbers in bold in the screen above For example the firmware version which is supported by this user guide is v2 30 S N This menu displays the unit s eight digit SN S N 12345678 Network Data This menu displays the unique network ID to which the unit is currently connected This ID will match the network ID displayed in the software in the Receiver icon s tooltip in the Map View Network data ID 014 061 082 Device Mode There are two possible device modes e Logger Device is operating as standard data logger e Logger Repeater 62 FOURTEC Device is operating as a Short Range Repeater Refer to section 3 8 5 for more details Leave Network lf this option is selected the unit will first leave the network and then reset itself The scan network procedure described in section 4 12 3 will begin The only exceptio
54. logger button Stop PicoLite is idle and is not recording When stopping the logger immediately ceases to record data Run PicoLite is recording data It will stop recording automatically when its memory has reached full capacity 16 000 samples Cyclic Run Similar to Run mode but PicoLite will continuously sample data recording over old data when the memory reaches its capacity beginning with the earliest data recording Cyclic Run mode must be selected from the logger Setup window in DataSuite Timer Run PicoLite can be configured to start recording at a predetermined time When PicoLite is set for such a run its status is set to Timer Run Push to Run PicoLite will only begin logging data when the user pushes the blue button for three seconds The logger LED will flash green for approximately 4 seconds when it starts to run 147 FOURTEC 16 6 2 Turning on the Unit To turn on the unit when using it for the first time simply connect the logger to the PC s USB port 16 6 3 Viewing Firmware Version The firmware version is displayed in the logger Setup window in DataSuite 16 6 4 Sensor Alarm Levels Via the software users can define minimum and maximum alarm levels for each input individually The PicoLite logger LED will flash red every five seconds when any alarm level is exceeded Note When the PicoLite is in Cyclic mode the Low or High alarm level indication represents the lowest or highes
55. logger memory itself 149 T FOURTEC Chapter 17 Using the DataSuite Software This chapter provides a detailed description of the DataSuite software features allowing you to configure and monitor your Fourtec data loggers in a unified application DataSuite supports a range of Fourtec loggers utilizing core functionality of the DataSuite platform such as setup calibration defining new sensors managing Email and SMS notifications configuring reports firmware updates and so on DataSuite supports the following Fourtec products e DagLink e DataNet e MicroLite amp Il e MicroLogPRO II e PicoLite 17 1 Installing DataSuite Software Part of your product package includes a DataSuite software CD Follow the software installation instructions provided below 17 1 1 System Requirements To work with DataSuite your system should be configured according to the following minimum specifications Software e Windows XP SP3 Windows Server 2003 SP2 Windows Vista or Windows 7 32 bit or 64 bit e Minimum screen resolution 1024 x 768 800 x 600 not supported Hardware e Pentium 4 2 0 GHz or better e 512MBRAM e 250 MB available disk space for the DataSuite application 17 1 2 Language Support DataSuite currently supports English Chinese French German Italian Japanese Portuguese Russian and Spanish interfaces To toggle the software language go to Help gt Language and click the desired l
56. may disable the LED alarm indication this will also reduce power consumption and prolong battery life 10 4 3 Replacing the Battery Replacing the battery does not result in any data loss In addition the logger s configuration settings are also retained Internal battery compartment with battery inside battery cover Removable As shown in the figure above the MicroLite internal lithium battery is located under a removable plastic cover To replace the battery simply use the groove in the plastic cover to twist the cover open and pull out the battery When twisting the cover back into position ensure that the small ridge on the battery cover is in line with the similar ridge on the logger case as indicated in the figure below Ensure ridge on cover and on logger case are in line Note Be sure to twist the plastic cover properly back into a sealed position to maintain the MicroLite s dust and waterproof compliancy After replacing the battery the MicroLite LCD will be in Stop mode 10 5 USB Connection The MicroLite interfaces with the computer via any of its USB Host ports No USB driver installation is required in order to be detected by the computer and by the DataSuite software The software will automatically detect the device upon connection to the PC 113 f FOURTEC 10 6 LCD Screen Overview The MicroLite has a 4 digit 7 segment LCD screen which is able to display the fo
57. more details 7 3 11 Sensor Calibration The DagLink data logger is shipped fully calibrated However further calibration can be applied via the DataSuite software The calibration parameters are sent to the data loggers via USB connection and stored in the logger s memory Users may calibrate individual inputs as well as all inputs at once Calibration settings may be saved and then loaded into the logger at a later date if the calibration settings have changed Refer to section 17 19 417 20 for more details 7 4 Unit Serial Number and Comment Every DagLink data logger unit is embedded with a unique serial number The data logger only can be loaded with a descriptive comment to identify its task and location You may add or edit the logger comment via the DataSuite software Every time data is transferred to the computer it is labeled both with the logger s serial number and comment and is displayed in the graph or data table view The unit serial number is also marked on a sticker on the back of the product 91 f FOURTEC Pid Power Supply 7 5 1 DBSA710 and DBSA720 Data Loggers The DBSA710 and DBSA720 data loggers run from an internal NiMh rechargeable battery as well as from external AC power supply Depending on the logger configuration from a fully charged battery the data logger can run for up to several months Refer to section 4 9 77 5 3 for more details on battery life Note Charge the data logger units
58. more than one network was found the user will need to select the network ID that he wants to connect to The user uses the Scroll button to scroll through the Network IDs The relevant network is selected using the Enter button Network 1 Network 2 Rescan networks ID 014 061 082 gt ID 021 207 175 Once the network has been selected the following screen will be displayed Joined network ID 021 207 175 58 FOURTEC To rescan the networks simply select the Rescan Networks option and the logger will start the scanning process again If only one network was found the system will automatically connect to that network without the user needing to select the network manually Scan for network Scan complete Joined to network Found 1 network ID 021 207 175 The logger display will return to the welcome message which consists of the logger name editable via the software and the network status e Ready If connection to the DataSuite software is established e Software is down If established connection to the Receiver but the DataSuite software is down PC is off software is not open etc e No Parent Signal The parent unit either the Receiver or Repeater is not detected by the logger therefore the logger is not transmitting its data to the network fourtec DataNet fourtec DataNet fourtec DataNet Ready Software is down No Parent Signal The logger will continue to search for the parent unit at specifi
59. must define the email addresses of the contacts to receive the Boomerang report This information is saved to the logger flash memory and is retained as part of the logger setup even if the battery is removed The temperature unit C or F in which the data is to be recorded is also defined if Setup for EC850 7008001 lea Properties Sensors Display Boomerang Report Settings V Include Boomerang Report Temperature Units c E Generated by User Comment New Device J Display alarm levels on graph Email Contacts Add Contacts x 2 tomc fourtec com tome Characters remaining 105 Custom Email f Setup amp Run Setup To enable Boomerang 1 Right click on the logger icon the Map View and select Setup 2 Perform logger setup using the various tabs When complete click on the Boomerang Report tab 3 Select the Include Boomerang Report checkbox This enables the Boomerang feature on the connected logger allowing generation of a data report when connected to another computer with DataSuite installed When this checkbox is unselected Boomerang is not enabled on the logger 4 Select the relevant temperature unit C or F for models measuring temperature 245 FOURTEC 5 Enter the relevant name in the Generated by field This is normally the name of the person responsible for the logger shipment 6 Enter a relevant comment in the Comment field The comment can be a brief
60. of the toolbar icons available in the software Main Upper Toolbar Icons wifa4O 0 e a fe Figure 78 Main toolbar icons The main toolbar is always available at the top of the DataSuite application no matter what window view the user is in This toolbar cannot be moved or hidden al amp Open file Opens archived logger data file stored on the PC Map view Switches main window to Map view where the units connected to the computer are represented gt ae Sensor view Switches main window to Sensor view where data from each running sensor is displayed in a simple view ey History view Switches main window to History view where archived logger data can be viewed and analyzed Alarm mute unmute Mutes or unmutes D an audible alarm in the system when a sensor reading has breached the user defined alarm level c Q Email Alarm Notifications Configuration window for Email alarm notifications hua SMS Alarm Notifications Configuration window for SMS alarm notifications GSM Modem Indicates if GSM modem is 5 connected green icon or disconnected grey icon SS Temperature unit toggle Display all data in Celsius o FF Temperature unit toggle Display all data in Fahrenheit o Reports Profile Manager Opens Reports module 164 es T FOURTEC Report Browser Opens window for browsing saved Reports Table 4 Main toolbar icon list 17 5 6 Map Vie
61. off simply press the Min Max Hours button for over one second If the unit is in sleep mode whereby the logger is running or in Stop mode but the LCD is off connecting the unit to the PC via USB or pressing the Min Max Hours button will turn the unit on 13 9 3 Logger Sleep Mode The MicroLogPRO II battery s long lifespan is achieved by putting the logger to sleep between recordings After 2 minutes of inactivity in Stop mode the logger will enter deep sleep To wake up a unit from deep sleep press the Min Max Hours button While in sleep mode the data logger consumes a minimal amount of power in order to extend the battery life Deep sleep mode can be disabled via the logger Setup window by unselecting the Deep sleep mode checkbox When disabled the logger will always stay on and consume more battery However an advantage of working in this mode is that when connected to the PC via USB the logger will always be automatically detected without the need to press the keypad to wake it up Note Disabling the deep sleep mode is only available in firmware v1 01 or higher and with DataSuite v2 2 0 0 13 9 4 Viewing Real time Data on LCD When MicroLogPRO II is sampling data the readings from sensors is alternately displayed on the LCD followed by the relevant unit e g C or F The data obtained from external sensors is displayed with a small EXT icon above the reading following by the unit 13 9 5 Viewing Firmware Version
62. or material it is measuring Recording Time This field displays the length of time the logger memory will be able to record for depending upon the number of sensors used and sampling rate Setup and Run Clicking Setup and Run will send the setup to the logger and immediately start logging data Setup Only Clicking Setup Only will send the setup to the logger but it will not actually start logging data You will need to select Run from the Logger context menu or go back into the Setup dialog 205 f FOURTEC Close Clicking Close will close the Setup dialog without saving any of your configurations Note Running the logger clears the logger memory All previously recorded data will be erased when you begin a new logging session 17 17 2 DaqLink Device Setup Tab The DagLink Setup window has two tabs Device Setup and Alarm Setup The main logger configuration is performed on the Device Setup tab Any alarm levels you wish to configure is performed on the Alarm Setup tab m j Setup aoan nnana lt _ lt _ Comment fourtec DagLink Serial number 80035 Comment on LCD fourtec DagLink Sampling rate h m s 00 00 30 Firmware version Memory State Online Mode Battery Level 100 Averaging points None Y E Cyclic Mode Temperature units on LCD oy C Recording time 5d 14 48 00 F Anti Tamper Mode Transmissions interval Od 00 00 30 Internal Temperature J
63. select Run from the Logger context menu or go back into the Setup dialog Close Clicking Close will close the Setup dialog without saving any of your configurations Note Running the logger clears the logger memory All previously recorded data will be erased when you begin a new logging session 17 17 3 DataNet and DaqLink Alarm Setup Tab A major feature of the DataNet and DagLink systems is the ability to configure alarm levels into the loggers so any breach of these levels as recorded on the data logger is monitored by the software and the user is notified via Email SMS audible and visual indicators 208 f FOURTEC The Alarm Setup tab lets you configure each sensor for the following alarms e Low e Pre Low e Pre High e High e Contact Open Contact Close when the Contact sensor is selected Using the Pre Alarms gives the user ample warning of a possible breach of real alarm levels so necessary measures can be taken to prevent such a breach Simply select the check box for the type of alarm you wish to be notified You can select all alarms too Enter the alarm value in the text box AG Setup Running Network Name DataNet network 2 Device Setup Alarm Setup Alarm delay 00 00 00 depends on the sampling interval Pre alarm delay 00 00 00 depends on the sampling interval Alarm duration 00 01 00 4 F Sound alarm during pre alarm Low Alarm Pre low Alarm Pre high Alarm High Alarm
64. than one logger on the Map View and send the same configuration to all of the loggers When this option is selected a dialog will open listing all of the loggers in the multi setup selection Setup File Use the Save Setup option to save a file containing the logger s current setup to any location on your computer 200 FOURTEC Using the Load Setup option from the Logger icon menu of another MicroLite you can then load the setup file to other units and run them without even opening the Setup dialog For mass deployment of MicroLite units using the same setup file you must first save the default setup file and then enable the Auto Setup mode from the Devices menu Auto Setup mode allows fast setup of all supported devices For more details on using this feature refer to section 17 17 6 Stop Sends a command to the logger to stop logging data Run Sends a command to the logger to start logging data This command will also clear the existing logger memory Remove This option removes from the Map View icons of loggers that are no longer in use 17 16 18 Viewing MicroLogPRO II Logger Status MicroLogPRO II Logger Tooltip enr ECKO Seal Humber 85007 Freezer 1 F Battery Level 100 Verston 1 0 7 0 Last Sample Time 04 07 11 08 13 29 Intemal Digital Temperature 28 10 C In online mode the logger displays e Device model EC800 or EC850 e Serial Number e Device Name e Battery status in e Versio
65. the CFR module Once either of these options has been selected you must provide the path to the DatPass database file in order to continue Click OK 21 CFR Part 11 Compliance The CFR module can only work together with DatPass CFR software installed separately To proceed with CFR module trial you must have access to the path of the database file created by DatPass A User ID created in DatPass will be required in order to access the software Please provide the path to the DatPass database file and click OK 3 Once the database path has been verified DataSuite will restart Upon restart the CFR Login dialog will open For first time login click New User A fourtec Fourier Technologies k Nev Use Figure 73 User Login Dialog 158 FOURTEC 4 Select the user via the drop down menu and proceed to enter the username and password associated with that user profile as created in DatPass Note If the system prompts a No New Users message then request your DataSuite system administrator to create a new user in DatPass 5 Click OK 6 Once logged into the DataSuite CFR software you will only have access to those features for which the Administrator has granted privileges 7 Tolog off from the system go to File gt Logoff The login dialog will remain open in case you wish to login again Note Once you have activated DataSuite CFR you cannot deactivate it and return to a non CFR environment
66. the main DataSuite directory Note If the logger is currently in Push to Run or Timer Run mode Update Firmware option will be disabled Setup Refer to section 17 17 on page 196 for an overview of how to setup the logger Setup File Use the Save Setup option to save a file containing the logger s current setup to any location on your computer Using the Load Setup option from the Logger icon menu of another MicroLite you can then load the setup file to other units and run them without even opening the Setup dialog For mass deployment of MicroLite units using the same setup file you must first save the default setup file and then enable the Auto Setup mode from the Devices menu Auto Setup mode allows fast setup of all supported devices For more details on using this feature refer to section 17 17 6 Stop Sends a command to the logger to stop logging data Run Sends a command to the logger to start logging data This command will also clear the existing logger memory 202 FOURTEC Remove This option removes from the Map View icons of loggers that are no longer in use Mark Time Stamp Selecting this option while the PicoLite is running will mark a new sample to the logger menu with a time stamp Refer to section 17 21 2 for more details on viewing time stamps in DataSuite 17 16 20 Viewing PicoLite Logger Status PicoLite Logger Tooltip PicoLite Serial Number 10017748 PicoLite Battery Level 90 Ve
67. the negative battery contact Red wire on the positive battery contact See example below 5 Insert the Mini DataNet circuit board into the main BXT plastic body so that the logger button will be facing the outside of the plastic casing 2 2 6 Close the compartment housing the circuit board with the plastic panel using the two screws provided Re attach the Mini DataNet antenna to the screw terminal which sticks out from the plastic panel 7 Remove the black battery holder from the main BXT plastic body and insert the 4 x AA batteries provided 8 Place the battery holder back into the BXT body and close the battery compartment with the provided plastic cover Secure the cover to the plastic body using the screw provided 9 The BXT logger is now ready for use Please contact support fourtec com with any problems 273 FOURTEC Appendix H Safety Information and FCC IDs Fourtec data logging systems comply with relevant safety regulations for data processing devices Please contact Fourtec with any questions regarding safety issues during the data logging process Note The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment Such modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Power Supply Safety Instructions A All Fourtec devices are supplied with either internal or external power supply Internal pow
68. the next step is to update the units 18 2 2 Using the Firmware Update Center To launch the Firmware Update Center 1 Once the downloaded firmware file is in the DataSuite directory go to Tools gt Firmware Update Center from the main menu Enter the password in the Password dialog to access the Update Center 200 FOURTEC 2 If no firmware file is detected in the DataSuite directory then an error message is displayed and the Firmware Update Center opens with a blank screen 3 Copy the firmware file to the directory and reopen the Firmware Update Center Note The default password is 1234 4 The Firmware Update Center dialog lists all units which were detected by the software and displays pertinent information such as available firmware versions firmware update status online offline status and unit info ah Poet cone Cory A ee arma Mas efte Meqeeetre leeerers 740 Sire a Thee laa TF ewig tt Howie OT heltn has Lyg 2 lieis Figure 108 Firmware Update Center dialog 5 Ifthe unit status is Requires an update then select the checkbox in the Update column adjacent to the unit you wish to update You may select as many units as you like to update but only two units can be updated at a time 6 As soon as you select the Update checkbox the command will be sent to the unit to begin uploading the firmware The firmware is first uploaded to the unit s memory and then installed Even if the update is stalled
69. the time Receiver Tooltip The tooltip will always display the following data even if offline e Unit type Receiver When the Receiver is online the following tooltip is displayed 194 T FOURTEC Receiver Serial Number 814781 Network 21 180 12 Version 3 1 1 89 In online mode the Receiver also displays e Serial Number e Network The Network ID of the currently formed network e Version Firmware version of Receiver 17 16 11 DataNet Repeater Icon Context Menu Wireless Connection Options Right clicking the Repeater icon will give the following options Setup Repeater Setup lets the user change the name of the unit Once the name has been changed click Setup or Close to close the dialog without making any changes Multi Setup By using multi setup you can select more than one Repeater on the Map View and send the same configuration to all of the Repeaters Call Unit Beep This feature sends a command to the Repeater to emit intermittent audible beeps for up to one minute This is useful when trying to physically locate a logger in your facility Press the Menu button on the Repeater to stop the audible alarm Leave Network Selecting this feature will kick the Repeater off the network You will be prompted to enter a password when selecting this feature Note The default password is 1234 Update Firmware Selecting this option will launch the Repeater firmware update process Refer to
70. to DataSuite User Guide Overview This user guide includes instructions for the DataNet DagLink MicroLite MicroLogPRO II and PicoLite products It is comprised of the following chapters e Chapter 1 Introduction e Chapters 2 4 DataNet e Chapters 5 7 DagLink e Chapters 8 10 MicroLite II e Chapters 11 13 MicroLogPRO II e Chapters 14 16 PicoLite e Chapter 17 Using the DataSuite Software e Chapter 18 Updating DataSuite Software and Firmware e Appendices A 16 T FOURTEC Chapter 2 DataNet Overview This chapter provides a general overview of the DataNet system as well as the concept behind the ZigBee RF protocol 2 1 DataNet Introduction Multi point online wireless data monitoring system Fourtec s next generation data logging system is the DataNet a 16 bit mobile data acquisition network based on the innovative and reliable ZigBee technology This solution provides an intelligent sensor mesh system with 100 data receipt and no data loss The DataNet system is comprised of a family of data logging units as well as a Receiver to manage the intelligent network and Repeaters to extend the transmission range The data loggers measure a broad range of parameters and include models that feature between one and four inputs for direct measurement and recording of PT 100 thermocouple 0 to 1 V 4 to 20 mA contact frequency and pulse sensors as well as internal temperature and relative humidity sensor
71. to display in the online or offline graph any time stamp marked using the MicroLite or MicroLogPRO II data loggers Refer to section 17 21 2 for more details Add Custom View Whenever the graph in History View is modified either by using the Zoom tool changing the scale panning the graph etc you have the option to add this customer graph view to the Data Map under the Custom Views node This will enable you to save projects which include the custom graph view for future reference Click the Add Custom View icon to perform this function Copying the Graph m Click the Copy Graph icon to copy the graph to the clipboard and paste it into another application such as a word processing or spreadsheet application Displaying Alarm Levels Open the Alarm drop down menu and select the relevant sensor to display its alarm levels Internal Digital Temperature Fourier Sws Int RH Fourier Systems LTO urrent 4 20 m Fourier Systems Fao The Stretch Compress Axis Tool Move the cursor onto one of the graph axes The cursor icon changes to the double arrow symbol lt gt indicating that you can stretch or compress the axis scale Drag the cursor to the desired location Repeat the procedure for the other axis if necessary To select a data set to display on the Y axis click on the data set s name in the Y axis list To display more than one curve click on the data sets you want 234 f FOURTEC F
72. to flash red even if logger returns to non alarm levels to indicate that the device was previously in alarm Marking a time stamp The LED will flash red once when a time stamp is marked as it is recording a new sample to the logger memory 148 FOURTEC Push to Run mode The LED will flash green for approximately four seconds after the PicoLite button is pressed to commence logging Firmware update The LED continually flashes green red until process is complete 16 6 7 Marking Time Stamps While the logger is running press the blue logger button for at least one second to record a new sample with a time stamp on the logger memory Each time stamp can mark a specific event such as the logger has reached its destination if used during to record temperature during product transportation The time stamp is visible both in the DataSuite data graph and table and the user can enter a comment in the table describing the event You can also mark a time stamp directly from the software when the PicoLite is connected to the PC right click Logger icon gt Mark Time Stamp Note Whenever the PicoLite is connected to the computer while in Run mode DataSuite will record a time stamp to the database When viewed in the History View data table the time stamp comment for this event will state Device connected to computer lt computer name gt This comment is only saved to the PicoLite data file on this computer not to the
73. uncheck the Lock Network menu item Take the first Mini DataNet device and from an Off state give the button on the front panel a short press The green LED will blink once every second until the logger joins the network The device icon will appear in the Map View Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for all Mini DataNet devices you wish to join to the network For more details on joining Mini DataNet units to the network refer to section 4 13 3 5 4 Loading Map View Background Load an image into DataSuite showing a map of your facility in order to place the Receiver and Logger icons in their relative positions As you add more loggers to the system this will prove very helpful Double click the Map View background to browse to the image directory and load the image Remember to unlock the Map View in order to move the icons around Right click the Map View background and two options will be available Load Wallpaper and Reset Wallpaper which resets to the default Fourtec wallpaper 31 w gt gt p 1 gt Ta 2 gt lt R W F aR Ya TSE _ n A k f De Figure 9 Map View background image example 3 6 Configuring the Logger na Once you connected your DataNet loggers to the network you must configure them in order to start acquiring data 1 Right click on the Logger icon you wish to configure Select Setup from the context menu 2 The Setup window will be launched Sensi tu
74. unit s eight digit SN S N 12345678 Memory Mode There are two possible device modes e Stop when full when the logger memory is full the logger will stop logging e Cyclic mode for continuous logging The logger will continue to log once the memory is full by writing over the first recorded samples The memory mode is toggled in the Setup dialog using the Cyclic Mode checkbox When the logger memory is full the LCD will display Memory Full Press Menu to pause logger when logger is in Run mode By pressing the Menu button the logger will cease to log data until the Menu button is pressed again from the same screen When in Paused mode the user can still scroll through the logger menu screens and use other features The user must scroll back to the Pause Logger menu in order to resume the logger operation 96 FOURTEC Reset Unit When the unit is reset upon start up it will automatically reconnect to the DataSuite software if a USB connection is established In addition if the logger will continue to operate according to its last set up instruction For example if the logger was in Run mode then after reset it will continue to run and record data Turn Off Unit Stop and turn off selecting this option will shut the unit down You can turn the unit on again by pressing the Scroll button If the logger is in Run mode selecting this option will first stop the logger and then turn it off It is rec
75. used to mark a specific event such as the logger has reached its destination if used during to record temperature during product transportation For the MicroLite II only while the logger is running placing the magnet key in the magnet holder for at least 2 seconds will record a new sample with a time stamp on the logger memory The time stamp is visible both in the DataSuite data graph and table and the user can enter a comment in the table describing the event There is capacity for a maximum of 99 time stamps in the logger memory When the memory is full the LCD will display FULL when you attempt to mark another time stamp To reset the Time Stamp memory perform a new logger setup If running the logger in cyclic mode time stamps marked during an earlier cycle will not be downloaded to the software Only time stamps from the current cycle will be downloaded 118 T FOURTEC Chapter 11 MicroLogPRO II Overview This chapter provides a general overview of the MicroLogPRO II data loggers 11 1 MicroLogPRO II Introduction Standalone Portable Temperature and Humidity Loggers The MicroLogPRO II series of data loggers are used to monitor temperature and humidity in a variety of applications such as perishable goods and controlled environments Each logger can also be connected to external sensors in order to monitor additional parameters such as voltage and current The license free DataSuite software is used to opera
76. 0 internal temperature sensor uses a PT 100 sensor element Calibration of this sensor is performed by calibrating the external PT 100 input i e two point calibration followed by Offset calibration 1 Inthe Calibration dialog select PT 100 in the Sensor drop down menu and select All inputs 2 Press Setup to proceed 3 Connect a calibrator or an actual PT 100 sensor to Input 1 Calibrate the input using the reference values 17 20 7 Calibrating the External PT 100 Sensor Input DataNet and DagLink PT 100 calibration is a standard two point calibration followed by Offset calibration Once the PT 100 sensor has been selected in the Sensor drop down menu click the Reset Calibration button Then proceed with the two point calibration procedure Before each calibration this step must be performed otherwise the calibration will not be accurate Once this calibration procedure is complete both the logger s internal temperature sensor PT 100 and external PT 100 inputs will be calibrated 230 f FOURTEC 17 20 8 Calibrating Thermocouple Inputs e To calibrate the Thermocouple temperature sensors TC J TC K and TC T first calibrate the 50 mV sensor type That will set the slope for all Thermocouple temperature sensors Then proceed to adjust the offset using the Offset calibration technique e You may calibrate all thermocouple sensor types at once or individually e Do not calibrate the thermocouple when the device is c
77. 00 C 0 5 4to20mA Range 4 to 20 mA Resolution 47 6 pA Accuracy 0 5 Loop impedance 21 Q Contact Range Open Close Temperature Thermocouple K Range 200 to 1 000 C Resolution 0 1 C Accuracy 200 to 60 C 0 5 60 to 60 C 0 5 C 60 to 1 000 C 0 5 Cold junction compensation 0 3 C Pulse Counter Input 4 only Range 1 to 65 536 counts Resolution 1 count Frequency range 0 to 4 KHz Input signal 0 to 5 V Input impedance 470 Q O0to1V Range 0 to 1 V Resolution 200 uV Accuracy 0 5 Input impedance 25 MQ Maximum voltage 5 2 V 18 11 General Specifications DaqLink Logger Sampling Features e Memory capacity 38 000 samples in Online Mode 59 000 samples in Optimized Memory Mode depending on logger configuration Once per second to once every 18 hours e Sampling rate e Channel separation 80 dB Temperature Thermocouple T Range 200 to 400 C Resolution 0 1 C Accuracy 200 to 60 C 0 5 60 to 60 C 0 5 C 60 to 400 C 0 5 Cold junction compensation 0 3 C Frequency Input 4 only Range 20 Hz to 4 KHz Input signal 0 to5 V Input impedance 470 Q 0 to 50 mV Range 0 to 50 mV Resolution 37 uV Accuracy 0 5 Input impedance 25 MQ Maximum voltage 5 2 V DBSA710 and DBSA720 Hardware Specifications Display e 2 row LCD e 16 character display 263 Ww Power Supply e Battery e Internal rechargeable 4
78. 00 don t have LCD screens therefore the process of joining these units to the network differs than that of the DataNet models with LCD Follow the steps below to connect these devices to a specific network 1 Right click the Receiver icon and select Mini DataNet Device Filter to first define the Mini DataNet devices that are allowed to connect to the network Enable the User Filter checkbox and then enter the SN of each Mini DataNet device in the text window and click Add Click Remove to remove a SN of a device you don t wish to join the network Note Note that by disabling the Device Filter unselect the Use Filter checkbox any Mini DataNet device is free to join your network It is recommended to use the filter if running multiple networks 30 T FOURTEC G Mini DataNet Device Filter Network Name DataNet Network Network ID 18 254 80 7 Use Filter 765362 765364 338838 Figure 8 Mini DataNet Device Filter dialog If a Mini DataNet device tries to join the network but it is not in the list then the software will send the Leave Network command to the device as it tries to connect to the network When a device tries to connect to a network and the software is down it will continue to the next available network If the software is up either the software will accept it or it will send the Leave Network command Ensure the network is not locked Right click on the Receiver Map View icon and
79. 012 00 00 00 Hv 24 12 2012 23 59 59 Hv S N Comment 9139910 fourtec 9140098 fourtec 5139940 fourtec 9140261 fote 9139956 fourtec 9139761 fourtec 9139955 fourtec 9139939 fourtec p Data File Path C Users Public fourtec Data Suite Data Files a Figure 84 Open Data Files dialog 4 Inthe Sync Data dialog you can select the sampling rate at which you wish to display the data The default option is the original rate Click OK 6 G Sync Data shoal x Display rate 00 00 10hh mm ss 00 00 20hh mm ss 00 00 30hh mm ss 00 01 00hh mm ss 00 05 00hh mm ss 00 10 00hh mm ss 00 15 00hh mm ss 00 30 00hh mm ss 01 f7 fAhh mm ee Figure 85 Sync Data dialog The data is opened in History View Refer to section 17 5 3 for an explanation of the History View You may display data sets from more than one logger and display them all in History View using the Data Map to navigate through the data Refer to section 17 5 4 for more details regarding the Data Map 185 f FOURTEC 17 15 Viewing Online Data You can view the data from any of your loggers in real time as the data is being recorded and transmitted to the PC For DataNet units the Receiver must be connected and the network up and running For all other standalone loggers the units must be connected via USB cable to the DataSuite software to enable online data view e
80. 1 FOURTEC Mark Unit on PC To indicate the Repeater icon in the software s Map View press the Enter button when this screen is displayed The Repeater s icon located in the Map View will blink a number of times Batt Level battery level e Ifthe power adapter is not connected the battery percentage will be displayed e Ifthe power adapter is connected Battery charging will be displayed Batt Level 67 Batt Level Battery charging Signal Level Test The Signal Level test allows the user to check the signal strength and quality of the link between the Repeater and its parent unit This test is used to determine optimal positioning of the Repeater during deployment Signal level Run test gt Menu By pressing the Menu button the unit will show the signal level and link quality in percentage terms lf there is no connection with a parent unit an Out of range message will be displayed Signal level 80 Out of range Link quality 95 e Signal level Indicates the reception level between end unit and parent unit If the level falls below 20 then the logger should be placed in a better location or another Repeater should be added e Link quality Calculation of the data transmitted with no errors from the Repeater to the parent unit If the level falls between 85 then the Repeater should be placed in a better location or another Repeater should be added The lower the link quality the more retries are needed in order
81. 1 Data Logger Front Panel Layout 4 1 1 DNL910 and DNL920 Apart from the color scheme the DNL910 DNL920 and PA data logger models have the same front panel design LCD screen Menu Enter button Scroll button Figure 18 DNL910 data logger front panel LCD screen Displays logger status logger data and network information Menu Enter button Use to enter logger menu options and to execute logger commands Scroll button Use to scroll though menu items and to power on unit 4 1 2 DNL804 DNL808 and DNL810 The Mini DataNet logger models have the same front panel design ae Multi function button pAn Dual color LED indicator Figure 19 DNL808 data logger front panel 42 f FOURTEC Multi function button Use to execute logger commands Dual color LED indicator Indicates status of logger such as joining network leaving network etc 4 1 3 DNL804 DNL808 and DNL810 BXT External Battery Pack The Mini DataNet BXT models have the same front panel design Multi function button Dual color LED indicator Figure 20 DNL804 BXT data logger front panel Multi function button Use to execute logger commands Dual color LED indicator Indicates status of logger such as joining network leaving network etc 4 2 Data Logger External Connections 4 2 1 DNL910 and DNL920 External connections of the DNL910 DNL920 and PA models are exactly the same Mini USB port 12 V power soc
82. 1 V Resolution 200 uV Accuracy 0 5 Input impedance 25 MQ Maximum voltage 3 2 V 20 Logger Input Specifications DNL910 Internal Digital Relative Humidity DNL920 Range 5 to 95 RH Resolution 0 5 RH Accuracy 3 RH software 4 RH Logger LCD Temperature Thermocouple T Range 200 to 400 C Resolution 0 1 C Accuracy 200 to 60 C 0 5 60 to 400 C 0 5 60 to 60 C 0 5 C Cold junction compensation 0 3 C Frequency Input 4 only Range 20 Hz to 4 KHz Input signal 0 to 5 V Input impedance 470 Q 0 to 50 mV Range 0 to 50 mV Resolution 37 uV Accuracy 0 5 Input impedance 25 MQ Maximum voltage 3 2 V 18 5 Current DNL804 Range 4 to 20 mA Resolution 1 16 uA Accuracy 0 5 Loop impedance 21 Q Internal Digital Temperature DNL810 Temp range 20 to 50 C Temp resolution 0 04 C Temp accuracy 0 4 C f FOURTEC Mini DataNet Sensor Specifications NTC 10 KO DNL808 Range 50 to 150 C Resolution 0 06 C Accuracy 50 to 60 C 0 3 C 60 to 150 C 0 5 Internal Digital Relative Humidity DNL810 RH range 5 to 95 RH resolution 0 5 RH accuracy 3 18 6 General Specifications DataNet Logger Sampling Features e Memory capacity 59 000 samples depending on logger configuration e Sampling rate Once every second to once every 18 hours e Channel separation 80 dB DataNet RF Network Communication e F
83. 10 3 Viewing Real time Data on LCD When the MicroLite is sampling data the readings from the sensor are displayed on the LCD alternately if more than one sensor followed by the relevant unit e g C F mA or V 10 10 4 Viewing Min Max Readings on LCD Note Available in MicroLite Il v1 01 and DataSuite v2 2 0 0 and higher only Via the DataSuite software you are able to configure the MicroLite to display Min Max readings from the current sampling session on the LCD immediately after the data samples are displayed To enable this feature enter the logger Setup window and in the Options section select the Show Min max samples on LCD checkbox Options Cyclic run Show Min Max samples on LCD LJ Only past 24h Push to run m Timer Run 18 39 06 Stop on key press This will show Min Max readings calculated from the full data set If running the logger in cyclic memory then the calculation will also be based on data from previous cycles To show Min Max readings from data recorded only in the last 24 hours then select the Only past 24h checkbox 10 10 5 Viewing Firmware Version For the MicroLite IlI only when the logger is in Stop mode the firmware version is displayed 2 seconds after placing the magnet key in the magnet holder When in Run mode the firmware version is displayed after 5 seconds On the LCD screen you will see F followed by the firmware version itself e g 01 01 The firmware version can also
84. 150 151 151 154 154 158 17 6 1 17 6 2 17 6 3 17 6 4 17 6 5 17 6 6 17 6 7 17 6 8 17 7 1 17 7 2 17 6 File Menu Items Open Open Project File Save Project Save Project As Backup System Files Restore System Files Print Map View Exit 17 7 DataNet Network Menu Items Show All Network Paths Refresh All Network Connections 17 8 Tools Menu Items Define Sensor Switch Sensor View Mode Lock Map View Options Menu Manage Contacts Email Alarm Notifications SMS Alarm Notifications Firmware Update Center 17 9 Tools gt Options Menu Items 17 9 1 Preferences Tab 17 9 2 Device Settings Tab 17 9 3 Email Settings Tab 17 9 4 SMS Settings Tab 17 9 5 Analysis Menu Items 17 10 Devices Menu Items 17 10 1 Detect Device 17 10 2 Stop All 17 10 38 Run All 17 10 4 Auto Setup Mode 17 11 Search Devices 17 12 Data Recovery 17 13 Saving Data 17 14 Viewing Archived Offline Data 17 15 Viewing Online Data 17 15 1 Showing Hiding the Data Sets 17 16 Working in Map View 17 16 1 Loading Map View Wallpaper 17 16 2 Printing the Map View 17 16 3 Displaying Icon Name Tags 17 16 4 Moving Icons around the Screen 17 16 5 DataNet Multiple Network Connections 17 16 6 DataNet Logger Icon Context Menu Wireless Connection Options 17 16 7 DataNet Logger Icon Context Menu USB Connection Options 17 16 8 Viewing DataNet Logger Status 17 16 9 DataNet Receiver Icon Contex
85. 17 20 Calibration Overview All Fourtec data loggers are shipped in compliance with their published accuracy specifications see Appendices for detailed logger specs Depending on the logger model either a printed calibration certificate is included with the logger packaging or a Declaration of Accuracy certificate is available for download on the Fourtec website DataSuite software includes a Calibration feature providing users with the capability to calibrate all data logger inputs The calibration process involves adjusting the measured values of the logger in order to improve accuracy which may be affected by external sensor deviations sensor drift over time or environmental conditions As with any calibration process a certified calibration instrument must be available to provide an accurate reference for data logger measurements For example an electrical or multi functional calibrator is suitable for voltage or current inputs and a climate chamber or bath is suited for temperature and humidity measurements A certified external calibration laboratory as well as Fourtec s own calibration facility may be used to perform this task as well as the customer s own equipment 224 f FOURTEC Note The calibration procedure is recommended to be performed at least once a year or as needed in order to verify that logger readings meet their specifications 17 20 1 Recommended Calibration Methodology The standard calibration pr
86. 17 dBm DNL910 PA 17 dBm Memory Capacity 59 000 samples Memory Capacity 59 000 Power supply AC or battery samples operated Power supply AC or battery operated 20 FOURTEC Mini DataNet Loggers without LCD es A h pig td DNL804 DNL804 DNL808 DNL808 BXT DNL810 DNL810 BXT BXT Single channel RF data Single channel RF data Dual channel RF data logger supporting external 4 logger supporting external logger with internal to 20 mA input temperature NTC 10KQ Temperature and probe Humidity sensors DNL8XX BXT Models BXT models include built in battery pack supporting up to 4 x AA 3 6 batteries for extended battery life of 3 years depending on sampling rate Functionality is identical to regular Mini DataNet loggers Only external casing and battery supply is different Transmission Range Transmission Range Transmission Range 4 dBm 4 dBm 4 dBm Memory Capacity Memory Capacity 59 000 Memory Capacity 59 000 samples samples 59 000 samples Power supply Power supply Power supply Battery operated Battery operated Battery operated 2 4 2 The Receiver Repeater Note The DNR900 can work in one of two modes Receiver or Repeater The DNR800 only works as a Repeater The Receiver DNR900 acts as a bridge between the DataNet network and the PC It is connected to the PC via USB cable and is used to create the network to which you add your data loggers The Receiver is externally powered but also includes a re
87. 17584 16 08 11 17 41 10 edge LE 17565 16 08 11 17 41 11 eae L 17586 16 08 11 17 41 12 edge L 17567 16 0841 17 4113 25 55 C 9 16 2011 5 41 13 PM TARA 1R 0A 11 1741 14 R RRT Statistics View The Statistics View also includes the time stamp when calculating Min Max and average Export to Excel Time stamps are also exported to Excel along with the rest of the data set Each time stamp is easily indicated by its comment in the Time Stamp Comment column 236 FOURTEC 17 41 05 25 47 17 41 06 25 49 or 16 2011 17 41 17 41 07 25 49 17 41 06 25 49 1620 16 06 11 17 41 09 25 49 1621 16 06 11 17 41 10 25 52 11622 16 05 11 17 41 11 45 52 16243 16 05 11 17 41 12 25 52 1624 16 05 11 17 41 13 25 55 or 16 2011 17 41 17 21 3 Changing the Graph Table or Statistics View Header Each Graph Table or Statistics tab has a header located above the specific view The default headers are e DataSuite Graph e DataSuite Table e DataSuite Statistics The header will also be included when printing the graph To change the header 1 Click Graph Properties on the graph toolbar 2 Click the Style tab and enter the graph header in the Header field 17 21 4 Statistical Analysis DataSuite also provides some basis statistics regarding the open data sets While in History View or online Data Display view click the Statistics tab For each of the sensors in the data set you will have the following statistics dis
88. 8 V 800 mAh NiMH battery 2 batteries in series e Battery Life Up to six months depending on logger configuration e AC Power e External 12 V DC input 300 mA 3 6 VA e Center Negative Operating Temperature Range e 20to 50 C e Water and dust proof IP54 PC Communication e USB 2 0 compliance e Mini USB type B cable Casing e Plastic ABS box e Dimensions 10 4 x 9 3 x 2 7 cm e Weight 153 g e Table and wall mounting Man Machine Interface Full keyboard operation Standards Compliance CE FCC IC Canada 18 12 System Requirements Software Hardware OS Platform Windows XP SP3 Windows Processor Pentium 4 2 0 GHz or Vista and Windows 7 32 and 64 bit better Screen Resolution Minimum 1024 x 768 Memory 512 MB RAM Storage Memory 250 MB available disk space for the DataSuite application 264 Range Accuracy Resolution Maximum Load Dew Point LCD LED Alarm Indicator Sample Memory Sampling Rate Battery Type Battery Life Operating Environment Dimensions with cap Weight Standards Compliance Wall Mount Appendix C MicroLite Specifications T FOURTEC 18 13 General Specifications LITE5008 LITE5016 Internal Temp 40 to 80 C 0 3 C 0 1 C display 0 01 C software N A NI X 8 000 and 16 000 Once per second once every 2 hours CR2032 3V 1 5 years depending on sampling rate and operating conditions LITE5008P LIT
89. A models supports the following features e Data Download Downloads logger memory directly to the DataSuite data files folder To view the data refer to section 17 14 e Firmware Update Refer to section 18 2 4 for more details e Turn Off Turns off the unit To detect the logger using USB 1 Make sure the data logger is joined to an existing network When connected to the computer via USB go to Devices gt Detect Device in the DataSuite main menu t 2 Right click on the logger USB icon fa to open the context menu and select one of the relevant options 17 16 8 Viewing DataNet Logger Status When you scroll the mouse cursor over the Logger icon a tooltip will pop up displaying data relevant to the Logger status at the time Logger Tooltip The tooltip will always display the following data even if offline e Network Name e Network ID e Logger Type e Serial Number e Logger Name Comment When the logger is online and running the following tooltip is displayed DataNet Logger Tooltip 191 Network Name DataNet network 2 Network ID 12 135 252 Logger DNL920 Serial Number 912486 Freezer Battery Level 86 Reception Quality 74 Version 3 4 2 36 Last Sample Time 25 10 11 15 38 44 Internal Digital Temperature 75 72 F Internal RH 56 0 In online mode the logger also displays e Device mode Logger or Short Range Repeater e The power status Battery left or Connected to AC e Re
90. AA lithium battery e Battery voltage range 2V 3 6 V e Battery life Up to 10 months depending on sampling rate and operating conditions Casing e Dimensions 68 x 68 6 x 26 5 mm without the cradle and the external antenna e Weight Logger 53 g Cradle 10 g External Antenna 17 5 g e Table and wall mounting Operating Temperature Range e 30to 75 C e Water and dust proof IP54 Mini DataNet Extended Battery Pack Hardware Specifications DNL804 BXT DNL808 BXT DNL810 BXT Power Supply e External battery pack e 4x AA3 6 V lithium battery e Battery life Up to 3 years depending on sampling rate Casing e Dimensions DNL810 BXT 10 2 x 8 8 x 5 3 cm without the external antenna DNL804 BXT and DNL808 BXT 9 x 8 8 x 5 3 cm without the external antenna and strain relief add on e Weight 137 g not including batteries 218g including four batteries External Antenna 17 5 g e Wall mounting Operating Temperature Range e 30to 75 C e Water and dust proof IP54 Man Machine Interface Full keyboard operation 260 f FOURTEC Standards Compliance CE FCC FCC Canada 18 7 System Requirements Software Hardware OS Platform Windows XP SP3 Windows Processor Pentium 4 2 0 GHz or better Vista and Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Memory 512 MB RAM Screen Resolution Minimum 1024 x 768 Storage Memory 250 MB available disk space for the DataSuite application 261 f FOURTEC Appendix B DaqLink Spec
91. Be careful to connect them in the right polarity 4 7 8 Frequency Pulse Counter Connect the signal wires to In 4 terminal blocks and select Frequency or Pulse counter for Input 4 from the logger Setup window in the DataSuite software Inputs 1 to 3 are still available for other sensors 51 f FOURTEC The Frequency Pulse counter is optically isolated from the internal circuitry and can simultaneously measure a signal source together with another input 4 7 9 User Defined Sensors DataSuite provides a simple and straightforward tool for defining a limited number of custom sensors Almost any sensor or transducer with O 1 V or 4 20 mA output is accepted by the DataNet logger and its electrical units are automatically scaled to meaningful user defined engineering units The sensor definitions are stored in the logger s memory and are added to the sensors list The sensor s readings are displayed in the user defined units only in the DataSuite software Future versions will also support displaying the user defined engineering units on the logger LCD Refer to section 17 8 1 for more details 4 7 10 Sensor Alarms Via the software users can define minimum and maximum alarm levels for each input individually Users can define pre low and pre high alarm levels for an additional level of safety in case the logger is approaching an actual breach of alarm The DataNet logger display indicates when the sensor reading is in al
92. C High Limit 20 0000 C 16 03 12 22 02 18 15 07 12 15 26 01 N A Calculate Figure 83 MKT dialog 3 Use the cursors to select the data set or leave the graph as is to perform the MKT calculation on the entire data set 4 Enter the relevant Activation Energy and the Low and High Limits of the data set to be calculated in C into the MKT dialog 5 Click Calculate A Pass or Fail indication will be displayed and in the event of a Pass the MKT value will also be displayed 6 Click Print to print the MKT dialog with the results Export to Excel You may export offline data to Excel by selecting this menu item or by clicking the Export to Excel icon in the lower graph toolbar in History View The data is opened in an Excel worksheet and includes pertinent information such as logger name SN sensor names alarm levels as well as the actual data readings Refer to section 17 22 for more information Export to CSV You may export offline data to CSV file format by selecting this menu item Upon selecting this option you will be prompted to save the file either in the default DataSuite directory or in directory of your choosing The data is opened in CSV file format and includes pertinent information such as logger name SN sensor names alarm levels as well as the actual data readings Refer to section 17 22 for more information 17 10 Devices Menu Items 17 10 1 Detect Device When DataSuite i
93. C Two point calibration Internal 17 20 3 Calibration Procedure Follow the procedures outlined below for calibrating your Fourtec data logger using DataSuite Note The calibration settings are saved to the logger memory so there is no need to calibrate the logger every time you run the software ET a Use the Logger Data pane to verify your logger readings in real time You can also view the logger s general status Figure 96 MicroLogPRO II Calibration dialog 22 FOURTEC 1 From the Map View open the Logger context menu and select Stop as calibration must be performed when logger is in Stop mode 2 Select Calibration gt Calibrate and enter the password in the Password dialog default password is 1234 3 Select the sensor you wish to calibrate from the Sensor drop down menu 4 For DataNet DagLink loggers a Ensure that the DataNet DNL9XX or DagLink logger has completed a full charging cycle of at least 16 hours prior to proceeding with logger calibration Refer to sections 3 5 1 for DataNet and 6 4 for DagLink for more details on the charging cycle b If calibrating an external sensor select the inputs to calibrate Select All or an individual input 1 to 4 c Click Apply to send the sensor setup to the logger d If you selected All inputs then by default the logger will be setup to log data on Input 1 during the calibration process Otherwise if you selected a specific input it will setu
94. D For MicroLite II only Configure the logger to display Min Max readings from the current sampling session on the LCD immediately after the data samples are displayed You can also choose to show Min max readings from data recorded in the last 24 hours as opposed to the full data set Sampling Rate Sampling rate is one sample per second to one sample per 18 hours 211 FOURTEC Averaging Points You can choose have online averaging of up to 10 points around the real value in order to smooth the data readings if they are a little noisy The recommended averaging is 4 samples Recording Time This field displays the length of time the logger memory will be able to record for depending upon the number of sensors used and sampling rate Setup and Run Clicking Setup and Run will send the setup to the logger and immediately start logging data Setup Only Clicking Setup Only will send the setup to the logger but it will not actually start logging data You will need to select Run from the Logger context menu or go back into the Setup dialog Close Clicking Close will close the Setup dialog without saving any of your configurations Note Running the logger clears the logger memory All previously recorded data will be erased when you begin a new logging session Sensors Tab Use this tab to configure the specific logger inputs which should be run in addition to relevant alarm levels A major feature of the DataSuite system
95. DaqLink system is powered by the powerful DataSuite software The Windows based software is the central management interface of the DaqLink network When connected via USB cable to the PC DaqLink data can be monitored online and displayed in real time graphs or tables Analyze data with various mathematical tools or export data to a spreadsheet The software also enables you to configure calibrate or update the firmware of DagLink units via direct USB connection Key DagLink benefits include e Real time logging Online operation with data results on screen e Independence Manual or PC operation with on site monitoring via two row LCD display e Intuitively Simple keypad and easy to navigate menus e Long life Low power consumption and rechargeable battery lasting up to six months e Flexibility Four alarm levels with visual LCD and audible alarms e Non stop logging Continuous data storage to large onboard memory and periodic USB downloads 76 T FOURTEC 5 2 The DaqLink System The basic DagLink system contains at least one of the following units e DagLink data logger Part Number DBSA710 or DBSA720 e Mini USB communication cable e Power adapter one per DagLink unit ordered e DataSuite software CD containing user guide 5 2 1 The Data Logger There are two data logger models compatible with the DagLink system These loggers support up to four external sensors and two internal sensors temperature an
96. E5032P Internal Temp 40 to 80 C 0 3 C 0 to 60 C 40 3 C 40 to 0 C and 60 to 80 C after calibration only 0 03 C or better N A 8 000 and 32 000 11x3 9x2 6cm CE EN12830 IP67 LITE5032P RH Internal Temp RH Temp 40 to 80 CT RH 5 95 Temp 0 3 C RH 2 RH Temp 0 01 C RH 0 05 RH N A NI 32 000 16K per channel LITE5032P 4 20 4 20 mA 4 20 mA 20 uA 1 uA display 5 uA software 25 mA 3 V N A N NI LITE5032P V 0 10 V 0 10 V 5 mV 1 mV display 4 mV software 12 V N A N NI 32 000 Once per second once every 18 hours CR2032 3V 2 years depending on sampling rate and operating conditions 40 to 80 C 11 x 3 9 x 3 cm 45 59 CE EN12830 IP54 Logger cradle accessory provided 265 LITE5032P EXT External NTC 50 to 150 C 0 3 C after calibration with Fourtec NTC sensor 0 02 C or better N A N A N NI 14 x 3 9 x 2 6 cm f FOURTEC 18 14 System Requirements Software Hardware OS Platform Windows XP SP3 Processor Pentium 4 2 0 GHz or Windows Vista and Windows 7 82 and _ better 64 bit Memory 512 MB RAM Screen Resolution Minimum 1024 x Storage Memory 250 MB available 768 disk space for the DataSuite application 266 Appendix D f FOURTEC MicroLogPRO II Specifications 18 15 General Specifications Internal Sensor Range
97. FDA Title 21 CFR Part 11 Compliant Supporting e DagLink e DataNet e MicroLite e MicroLogPRO IlI e PicoLite www fourtec com INNOVATIVE MONITORING SOLUTIONS qd z t O LS D va 40 dad O User Guide DataSuite User Guide Supporting Fourtec Data Loggers DaqLink DataNet MicroLite II MicroLogPRO II PicoLite Supporting DataSuite version 2 4 0 0 December 2013 Fourtec Fourier Technologies Ltd f A FOURTEC Contacting Fourtec technical support Email support fourtec com Web www fourtec com Telephone Worldwide 972 3 901 4849 USA 1 888 778 4927 toll free within USA only To download updated versions of the DataSuite User Guide and DataSuite software firmware visit www fourtec com Information in this document is subject to change without notice 2013 Fourtec Fourier Technologies Lid All rights reserved Reproduction of this document in any manner without the prior written consent of Fourtec Fourier Technologies Ltd is strictly forbidden What s New in this Edition e DataSuite software support for Chinese French Italian Japanese Russian and Spanish language interfaces Go to Help gt Languages to switch from the default English interface to either of these languages German and Portuguese are already available from v2 3 4 0 e Updated sections 4 7 4 and 7 3 4 regarding correct connection of PT 100 sen
98. FR module cannot be activated placed in trial mode without a valid user ID provided by the DatPass Admin software which manages the DataSuite CFR platform e When the trial period for the CFR module ends DataSuite will revert to the standard non CFR environment unless activated 17 2 1 Software Activation Process Note The software activation forms are all case sensitive Incorrect entry will result in invalid activation To activate any one of the DataSuite modules follow the instructions below 1 Locate the DataSuite module serial number SN The SN label is found on the DataSuite box as well as on the software CD case Note If you cannot locate your serial number contact your Fourtec distributor or Fourtec Customer Support directly 2 Launch DataSuite The activation wizard will open 3 To open the activation wizard from within DataSuite go to Help gt Activate 4 From the bottom of the wizard Home screen select one of the module buttons to proceed to the activation screen for that module 154 T FOURTEC O 5 Three choices are presented Select the relevant option and click Next to proceed EE CE scsi DaqLink Start your 30 dey trial penod oF ac raia the merkie unng he horme key feel om fwe software CD Qo im amp Lo Activation via the Internet Select to proceed with activation on the same computer on which DataSuite is running ensuring it has a liv
99. Internal RH 7 2014 23 41 49 27 95 32011 23 41 50 af N S F i2011 23 41 51 20 3 i2011 23 41 52 20 01 3 i2011 23 41 53 20 01 3 i2011 23 41 54 20 04 a i2011 23 41 55 20 04 32011 23 41 56 20 05 3 i2011 23 41 57 20 05 32011 23 41 55 20 05 Figure 103 Example of data exported to Excel Only offline data opened in History View can be exported to CSV and is available under the Analysis menu 17 23 Printing the Data You are able to print data by clicking the Print icon E from the lower toolbar in Graph Table or Statistics tabs of the offline or online data displays Clicking the Print icon will open the Print Setup dialog where you will need to select the printer to print to When printing a table you can select the specific data range you wish to print You are able to adjust the date and time in order to narrow the data range Print Table From 41 02 12 00 00 47 Ev Until 20 02 12 23 59 34 Jr Figure 104 Printing a table 238 T FOURTEC 17 24 Reports Module The Reports module provides an intuitive interface for creating and generating DataSuite reports Each report contains a wide range of parameters garnered from all units supported by the software Each report can be sent via e mail to a selected distribution list at pre defined time intervals in PDF and Excel format All reports are saved in the default directory C Program Files Fourtec DataSuite Reports To change this path go to the Prefe
100. Measurement Accuracy Range Temperature 50 to 150 C 50 to 60 C 0 3 C NTC 10 KQ 60 to 150 C 0 5 4 7 3 Sensor Connection Connect the sensor s to the terminal block s at the top of data logger a Figure 28 DataNet logger sensor inputs Sensors do not have to be added successively You may only configure In 4 or configure In 1 and In 3 for example when setting up the logger via the software 4 7 4 External PT 100 and NTC Sensor Connection The polarity of the Fourtec supplied PT 100 temperature sensor Supporting the DNL910 DNL920 models for correct wire up to the data logger s terminal blocks is as follows e Two red wires are intertwined and connected together to the negative input e The white wire is connected to the positive input The polarity of the NTC Temperature sensor wires Supporting the DNL808 BXT model is not an issue when connected to the logger s terminal block One wire is connected to each input 4 7 5 Programming Limitations for DNL910 and DNL920 The standard sampling rate for all sensors on all inputs is from a maximum of one sample every second to a minimum of one sample every two hours However there are certain limitations using a specific combination of sensors which must be taken into account when programming the DataNet data loggers Note The software integrates all programming limitations automatically when configuring the loggers 49 FOURTEC Pl
101. Multi trip USB Logger e MicroLogPRO Il Multi input USB Logger e PicoLite Single E Trip USB Logger DataSuite key features include e Software GUI based on proven Fourtec platforms e Multiple data view features e Map view displaying unit icons and pertinent configuration details e Boomerang feature for automatic creation and emailing of PDF data reports upon logger detection e Alarm features with multiple alarm levels triggering email and SMS notifications 15 FOURTEC e Reporting module for creating and generating reports with selected distribution e Analysis features including dew point analysis FO Pasteurization histogram Statistics with export to Excel and CSV formats e FDA Title 21 CFR Part 11 compliancy e API support DataSuite CFR Compliancy DataSuite includes an additional CFR module which together with the separate DatPass Administrative software achieves compliance with FDA Title 21 CFR Part 11 Among other features it defines the users that can log into the DataSuite software their passwords and the digital signatures the users are permitted to sign data within electronic records files DatPass also maintains an audit trail to keep track of all activities performed within the system and user privileges can be defined as well The CFR module includes a 30 day free trial period following which the module must be activated using a unique license key The CFR module supports all hardware connected
102. NC AAC 13032181 130312 1818 foumecton tema RH J54 3 357 130312181 1203121818 Figure 68 Online data Statistics view 15 6 2 Logger Tooltip Close the online data window and return to Map View Scroll over the Logger icon and you will see a tooltip displaying the relevant logger information including real time data 144 PicoLite Serial Number 123456 abed1234 Battery Level 89 Version 1 0 1 07 Last Sample Time 12 06 12 08 13 58 PicoLite Temperature 35 50 C Figure 69 Logger tooltip This tool tip is updated with every newly recorded sample 15 6 3 Sensor View Click the Sensor View icon 4 in the tool bar to switch to this view Here you can have a limited data display for each connected logger s temperature input for a side by side comparison DataSuite File DataNet Network Tools Devices Analysis Report Help EEEL OET Figure 70 Sensor view e lf the sensor is in alarm the sensor box will change color from green to red just as the Logger icon would e Double clicking the individual sensor box will open the data in the online Graph view 15 7 Downloading Data If the logger is being used as a standalone device you will have to connect it to the computer via USB in order to download the data to the software 1 Connect logger to PC and go to Devices gt Detect Device in the main menu 2 Data download should begin automatically To manually download data right click
103. Net network 2 Network ID 12 135 252 Receiver DNR900 Serial Number 809089 Version 3 1 2 45 17 16 6 DataNet Logger Icon Context Menu Wireless Connection Options Right clicking the DataNet Logger icon when connected wirelessly to the network will give the following options 188 FOURTEC Display Data Displays the logger s data in Graph view The graph displays the data in real time There is also the option to display the data in Table view or to view the data statistics Download Data Downloads all data in the logger memory to the DataSuite software When logger is downloading the data the Logger icon in Map View will appear as follows Note Data download is also available via USB connection Refer to section 17 16 7 Cancel Download When logger is downloading data you may cancel the download per logger by selecting this menu item As cancelling the data download results in data not being downloaded to the computer there is a chance that data may be lost if the download isn t completed at a later stage and the logger s cyclic memory has meanwhile erased these readings Note Cancel Download feature works only if there are no other commands in the queue following the Download process For example if the data is downloading and you sent the command Call Unit to the logger and then selected Cancel Download the download will not be cancelled Reset Alarm When the logger is in a state of alarm this o
104. Specifications 18 7 System Requirements APPENDIX B DAQLINK SPECIFICATIONS 18 8 Data Logger Input Types 18 9 DBSA710 and DBSA720 Outputs 18 10 Logger Input Specifications DBSA710 and DBSA720 18 11 General Specifications 18 12 System Requirements APPENDIX C MICROLITE SPECIFICATIONS 18 13 General Specifications 18 14 System Requirements APPENDIX D MICROLOGPRO II SPECIFICATIONS 18 15 General Specifications 18 1 External Sensor Specifications 18 2 System Requirements APPENDIX E PICOLITE SPECIFICATIONS 18 3 General Specifications 18 4 System Requirements 248 248 250 250 250 202 253 254 200 256 256 257 258 258 261 262 262 262 262 263 264 265 265 266 267 267 268 268 269 269 269 APPENDIX F APPENDIX G APPENDIX H APPENDIX I DATANET MOUNTING DIAGRAMS MINI DATANET BXT ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS SAFETY INFORMATION AND FCC IDS ORDERING INFORMATION 270 272 274 277 FOURTEC Chapter 1 Introduction DataSuite software from Fourtec provides a modular platform which supports a wide range of Fourtec data loggers Use DataSuite to monitor and analyze data from multiple systems in one unified view The DataSuite solution supports simultaneous connection of the following Fourtec data acquisition systems e DataNet Wireless Logging System DaqLink 7 Standalone Multi input Logger e MicroLite
105. a set Hidden internal Humidity sensor data set Displayed external sensor data set Hidden internal sensor data set Displayed graph function Hidden graph function 168 FOURTEC i Parent node for all logger data sets Click to expand or collapse all child nodes Logger data set Click to expand or collapse the data set containing all measured inputs of the specific logger of Parent node for all custom graph views Click to expand or collapse all child nodes 0 Displayed custom graph view When hidden the icon is grayed out Table 6 Data Map icons 17 6 File Menu Items 17 6 1 Open Select Open to access archived data files for each logger in your network Shortcuts You can also click the Open icon if or press Ctrl O to open archived files 17 6 2 Open Project File Opens project files of offline data containing data from one or more loggers as opposed to standard data files containing data from only one logger 17 6 3 Save Project Saves multiple data sets and custom graph views into a single Project File Only available in History View 17 6 4 Save Project As Saves an existing Project file under a different name 17 6 5 Backup System Files This feature allows the user to backup system data and configuration files for all DataSuite modules to a defined path on the local computer network or USB memory Stick Backing up these files to a secure location will ensure that in the event of damage
106. about to deploy Once the setup is complete for all Setup tabs click the Setup button Right click on the logger icon again and this time select Setup File gt Save Setup Enter the setup file name and save it in the relevant location Filename PicoLiteTestSetup MAxSetup The file name extension is MXSetup Next go to Devices gt Auto Setup Mode gt Add Setup File and browse to the setup file saved in the previous step Click Open to load the file _ PicoLiteTestSetup MaASetup MASETUP File pe 107 KB Filename PicoLiteTestSetup MxSetup Logger Setup File MaASetup The Setup file name will be listed in the Auto Setup Mode menu Once the file is added the Auto Setup Mode is automatically enabled You can add up to three separate setup files to this list To enable Auto Setup Mode in future just select the relevant file from the list A semi transparent info box will appear in the lower right corner of the DataSuite window 218 FOURTEC paea q j gt aad A A a AUTO gt eitup Mode PicoLie Jor As long as Auto Setup Mode is enabled this info box will appear You are able to drag it anywhere in your DataSuite Map View This box provides the following information a The Serial Number of the unit currently being configured with the default setup b The setup status Processing or Done c The total number of units which were setup in the current Auto Setup session If you connect the sa
107. al 0 10 V input 32K sample memory External 4 20 mA input 32K sample memory Internal NTC Temp sensor External sensor input Internal Digital RH and Temp sensor External sensor input T FOURTEC Part Number Product Name Product Description PICOLITE 16K PicoLite USB Temp e Internal Temp sensor Logger e 16K sample memory 279
108. anguage You must then restart DataSuite for the changes to take effect 150 f FOURTEC 17 1 3 Working with User Accounts The software installation procedure and license activation process must both be carried out by a user with Administrator privileges otherwise there will be problems accessing the software by user s with standard non Admin privileges Each specific user account that accesses the DataSuite software module can commence trial period for that specific account However as soon as a user with Administrator privileges activates the module with the unique license serial number then all user accounts which had previously been in Trial mode will now be fully activated All users will have full access to the DataSuite module s settings and data files 17 1 4 Installation Procedure Note If you are planning to use more than one Fourtec system e g DataNet and MicroLogPRO Il only one DataSuite software installation is required Each product is managed by a specific product module within the DataSuite modular application Note Remember that the installation and activation procedures must be carried out by a user with Administrator privileges Please read these instructions before proceeding with the installation process 1 If a previous installation of DataSuite exists on the computer you must first uninstall it before proceeding with the installation process 2 Insert the DataSuite software CD into your comp
109. ansportation cold chain processes Effective cold chain processes require control over the quality of perishable goods and compliancy with the highest industry standards Featuring a built in temperature sensor activation button bi color LED and direct USB connectivity the PicoLite offers a plug and record solution for every application The PicoLite is configured by Fourtec s intuitive DataSuite software offering comprehensive data analysis features and alarm notifications By reducing overhead related to more complex multi trip loggers the PicoLite meets the challenge of combining low cost with reliability for one trip value for money data logging Key PicoLite benefits include e Low cost one trip disposable logger for an unbroken cold chain e Internal high accuracy temperature sensor e Unique Boomerang feature that automatically creates and emails PDF data report when logger is connected to PC e Direct USB interface for PC communication e 16 000 sample memory accommodating long distance transports e Software enabled activation button to start logging and mark time stamps e Built in bi color LED for sampling and alarm indication 138 FOURTEC e Supported by the complimentary DataSuite software for data analysis and alarm notification e 6 month battery life in normal ambient conditions e Water and dust resistant IP67 14 2 PicoLite Packaging The PicoLite is generally shipped in carton s containing 100 units per carton
110. arm of any type The symbols AL H AL L AL P H or AL P L are visible next to the corresponding input readings Refer to section 0 for more details 4 7 11 Sensor Calibration The DataNet data logger is shipped fully calibrated However further calibration can be applied via the DataSuite software The calibration parameters are sent to the data loggers wirelessly and stored in the logger s memory Users may calibrate individual input as well as all inputs at once Calibration settings may be saved and then loaded into the logger at a later date if the calibration settings have changed Refer to section 17 20 for more details 4 8 Unit Serial Number and Comment Every DataNet data logger and Receiver Repeater unit is embedded with a unique serial number The data logger only can be loaded with a descriptive comment to identify its task and location You may add or edit the comment of any logger on the network via the DataSuite software Every time data is transferred to the computer it is labeled both with the logger s serial number and comment and is displayed in the graph or data table view The unit serial number is also marked on a sticker on the back of the product 52 f FOURTEC 4 9 Power Supply 4 9 1 DNR90OO in Receiver Mode The Receiver unit is powered via the USB port of the PC when connected via the mini USB cable In addition the unit can run for a limited time up to three hours from an internal N
111. battery level model number and firmware version of the current unit On the Properties and Sensors tabs the user is able to configure the following parameters Unit s comment Sampling rate Activation and memory modes Averaging points Temperature units C F on the logger LCD Display of Min Max data on LCD Active sensors Alarm levels Alarm delay 104 FOURTEC 2 Inthe Properties tab a Select the memory mode Cyclic or non Cyclic b Select the activation mode Push to Run Timer Run or leave the checkboxes unmarked for immediate activation a If you want the ability to stop the logger during operation select the Stop on key press checkbox b For external input models if you want the logger to stop recording data when the cap is removed select the Stop on cap removal checkbox Note that the logger will only stop when the next sample is due to be recorded c Select the sampling rate anywhere from 1 every second to 1 every 18 hours Refer to the Recording Time to ensure the logger won t stop or begin cyclic recording before the end of your specific measurement session 3 Inthe Sensors tab a For the Temp RH model select the sensors you wish to activate during the current logging session All other models feature just one sensor and at least one sensor must always be selected b If you require alarm levels select the relevant checkboxes and enter the specific threshold value
112. be seen in the logger Setup window in DataSuite or in the logger icon tooltip in Map View 10 10 6 Sensor Alarm Levels Via the software users can define minimum and maximum alarm levels for each input individually The MicroLite logger display indicates when any alarm level is exceeded 117 f FOURTEC Note When the MicroLite is in Cyclic mode the Low or High alarm level displayed represents the lowest or highest readings recorded since the logger starting logging data irrelevant of how many cycles the logger has recorded AL L A sensor s reading is ower than its low alarm level AL H A sensor s reading is higher than its high alarm level The alarm notification remains until the next time you change the logger setup or run a new recording session 10 10 7 Alarm Duration The MicroLite calculates the duration of an existing alarm and displays it on the loggers LCD The calculation is made in hours and is indicated on the LCD as H For example the shortest possible duration of 0 01H means the logger has been in alarm for between 0 and 36 seconds A duration of 1 55H means the logger has been in alarm for 93 minutes 1 55 hours If the MicroLite is in a Low and High alarm simultaneously then it will show the duration for both alarms Even if the logger is not currently in alarm state the duration will still be displayed if an alarm previously occurred 10 10 8 Marking Time Stamps Time stamps can be
113. ble the Pan tool The Cursor You can display up to two cursors on the graph simultaneously Use the first cursor to display individual data recording values Use two cursors to display the difference between two coordinate values to display the frequency of periodic data or to select a range of data points Sd AS a MFP Rae menses LFE L Hu Ki BES OIRIS Yi O DT ID y mT Y2 Yi Bin Figure 99 Example of using two cursors When using two cursors the Statistics feature will calculate statistics according to the data set between the two cursors To display the first cursor Click 1 Cursor on the graph toolbar You can drag the cursor with the mouse onto any other point on the plot or onto a different plot For finer cursor movements use the forward and backward keys on the keyboard The coordinate values of the selected point will appear in the information bar at the bottom of the graph window To display the second cursor Click 2 Cursor and drag the cursor with the mouse onto any other point on the plot The information bar will now display the difference between the two coordinate values To remove the cursors Click the cursor icons a second time 233 FOURTEC Grid Click the Grid icon to adda grid to the background of the graph view To remove the grid click the icon again enw o Figure 100 Graph with grid in background Show Hide Time Stamps By default the Time Stamp icon is enabled
114. blished a network you are ready to add data loggers and build your system 3 5 1 Charging DataNet Loggers This section refers to charging the DNL910 or DNL920 loggers The Mini DataNet units are battery operated only Note Only use adapters provided by Fourtec Use of the wrong adapter could damage your DataNet units Note DataNet units do not charge when switched off If the loggers will run from the battery supply make sure to first charge each of the loggers for 16 hours before use in order maximize the battery life A fully charged battery can last several months depending on your logger configuration Refer to section 4 9 7 or more details on battery life If the loggers will run from the AC power supply when first connected to the AC adapter the logger will always initiate the 16 hour charge cycle However if you reconnect the AC charger within one hour of disconnection from the unit the logger will not start a new 16 hour charging cycle as long as battery level is at least 90 Note For loggers measuring data with the internal temperature sensor it is critical to note that during the charge cycle the logger will heat up thereby causing the internal temperature sensor reading to rise up to 10 C above ambient temperature Once the charging process is complete the logger will cool down and the internal temperature sensor readings will return to normal For loggers remaining connected to AC power to prevent the logger fr
115. c intervals and the screen will continue to read Search Parent until the parent is found Scenario 2 When the unit scans for networks and finds the last network that it was connected to it will automatically connect to the last Known network Joined Network ID 021 207 175 As in Scenario 1 the logger display will then return to the welcome message displaying the unit name and status Scenario 3 The system can t find any networks at all If no networks were found the unit will display the following screens Scan for network Scan complete No found networks Found 0 network 5 Rescan networks 59 FOURTEC Scenario 4 The unit found a network but failed to join The unit will perform up to 99 retries to join the network before scanning for networks again Press any of the unit buttons to cease the attempts to join the network A unit may fail to join a network if it is far from the Receiver requiring several hops to reach the Receiver or the network itself is large with many units The attempt to join a network is made in under a second in real time and on high traffic network it may result in failure to join Moving the unit closer to the Receiver can help the logger to join successfully If the logger still can t join form a new network or contact Fourtec technical support 4 12 4 Main Menu Options There are three menu categories on the data logger e View Data e Status Note If the unit is not in Run mo
116. ception quality Strength of RF signal between logger and Receiver e Version number Firmware version of the logger e Last sample time If logger is running time stamp of last recorded sample e Real time Sensor values All sensor values are displayed including sensor name and alarm status DataNet Command Queue Progress The tooltip is updated with specific commands being performed by the DataNet logger For example if the logger is downloading data to the software you can see the progress in the tooltip In addition the Logger icon has a blue progress indicator SO you Can monitor the progress without using the tooltip T Logger DNLS10 Serial Number 808932 DNL 910 D3 2C Battery Level 100 Reception Quality 100 VYersion 3 1 1 89 Command Queue Progress 0 1 Download 2 Beep Common commands include Download Setup Stop Run Beep and more 17 16 9 DataNet Receiver Icon Context Menu Right clicking the Receiver icon will give the following options e Setup e Update Firmware e Lock Network e Form New Network e Refresh Network Connections e Show Network Paths e Mini DataNet Device Filter 192 e Change to Repeater Update Firmware Cancel Firmware Update Lock Network Form New Network Refresh Network Connections Show Network Paths Mini DataNet Device Filter Change To Repeater Setup Receiver Setup lets the user change the name of the network name assigned to that specific Receiver The
117. charge depending on the logger configuration The DNL910 PA and DNL920 PA loggers include power amplification PA enabling longer transmission range compared to the non PA units and as a result has high power consumption The PA units therefore must be connected to AC power at all times otherwise its battery will drain after a few hours The battery for the DNL804 DNL808 and DNL810 is not rechargeable and can run up to ten months before being replaced depending on the logger configuration 19 FOURTEC The DNL8XX BXT models provide extended battery life to the existing Mini DataNet loggers for up to 3 years with 4 x AA 3 6V batteries connected Refer to section 4 9 7 for more information Note Battery life depends on the logger sampling rate transmission rate type of sensor network architecture and number of measured sensors The seven DataNet models can be divided into two groups e DataNet loggers with LCD e Mini DataNet loggers without LCD DataNet Loggers with LCD Y wy Part Number DNL920 and Part Number DNL910 and DNL920 PA DNL920 PA Four external channel RF data logger Four external channel RF data with two internal sensors Humidity logger with internal Temperature and Temperature sensor PA model includes Power Amplifier PA model includes Power Amplifier for long range transmission for long range transmission Transmission Range Transmission Range DNL920 4 dBm DNL910 4 dBm DNL920 PA
118. chargeable battery for back up in case the external power fails More than one Receiver may be detected by the software enabling the running of multiple DataNet networks from one PC Note Each Receiver can detect up to 8 data loggers and 16 Repeaters To detect more data loggers Repeaters are required The Repeater is considered the backbone of the network as it enhances the network range by receiving and transmitting between end unit and Repeater until it reaches the PC There are two Repeater models the DNR900 with LCD and the DNR800 Mini Repeater without LCD Both are externally powered via the AC i l y i i j Se FOURTEC adapter but the DNR900 also includes a rechargeable battery back up in case the external power fails The Repeaters are the end units parent units meaning each Repeater has specific end units under their responsibility their children They route the transmissions to and from the end units to the Receiver or other Repeaters in the network Each Repeater holds the data sent to the end units while the end units are in sleep mode At a specific interval the end unit wakes up and receives the data from its parent Repeater Note Each Repeater can detect up to 24 data loggers and 16 Repeaters including the parent unit If the number of loggers exceeds this capability additional Repeaters are required Receiver Repeater with LCD Part Number DNR900 Repeater Transmission Range
119. ckets messages between devices on the network and increases the distance between these devices The End Unit This device sends and receives information to other devices on the network It is usually a control or a sensor unit often battery operated A ZigBee end unit cannot relay messages ZigBee Terminology DataNet Terminology Coordinator Receiver Router Repeater End Unit Data Logger ZigBee enables mesh networking which supports a wireless yet integrated environment with communication between many coordinators routers and end units in environments where multiple applications are being monitored 2 3 1 ZigBee Mesh Network Operation Figure 1 ZigBee network diagram 18 FOURTEC In a mesh network all the router units are aware of their environment meaning a router Knows with units are close by When a router sends a message to a specific unit it relays the message until it gets to the destination Network recovery from a unit failure In a mesh network when a router fails the network automatically finds a different path via a different router for the message relay This ensures maximum protection against a network breakdown 2 3 2 Why is ZigBee Technology Key for Data Logging ZigBee technology has proved to be ideal for data acquisition networks which require meter reading parametric display of data such as temperature or humidity and responsive action when parameters are crossed This is due to the fully automated
120. cks and select Frequency or Pulse counter for Input 4 from the logger Setup window in the DataSuite software Inputs 1 to 3 are still available for other sensors 90 FOURTEC The Frequency Pulse counter is optically isolated from the internal circuitry and can simultaneously measure a signal source together with another input 7 3 9 User Defined Sensors DaqLink provides a simple and straightforward tool for defining a limited number of custom sensors Almost any sensor or transducer with 0 1 V or 4 20 mA output is accepted by the DagLink logger and its electrical units are automatically scaled to meaningful user defined engineering units The sensor definitions are stored in the logger s memory and are added to the sensors list The sensor s readings are displayed in the user defined units only in the DataSuite software Future versions will also support displaying the user defined engineering units on the logger LCD Refer to section 17 8 1 for more details 7 3 10 Sensor Alarms Via the software users can define minimum and maximum alarm levels for each input individually Users can define pre low and pre high alarm levels for an additional level of safety in case the logger is approaching an actual breach of alarm The DagLink logger display indicates when the sensor reading is in alarm of any type The symbols AL H AL L AL P H or AL P L are visible next to the corresponding input readings Refer to section 0 for
121. connected to the PC the data will not be transmitted in real time Cyclic Mode If this checkbox is not selected the logger will stop recording data when the memory capacity is filled Enabling Cyclic mode will result in the oldest samples in the memory being overwritten by new samples once the memory is full This allows continuous data logging Averaging Points You can choose have online averaging of up to 10 points around the real value in order to smooth the data readings if they are a little noisy The recommended averaging is 4 samples Note If configuring Alarm duration with averaging points selected the alarm will be counted from the time of the last sampling point used to calculate the average Temperature Units Toggle between C and F This applies to the readings displayed on the logger LCD as well as in the software Anti tamper Mode To prevent tampering with the DagLink logger selecting this option will disable the following features on the logger menu e Pause e Reset e Stop and turn off unit When running DataSuite with the CFR module activated the Anti tamper checkbox will be disabled by default While working in a CFR environment the user will not have permissions to pause reset stop or turn off the DagLink unit via the LCD menu 207 f FOURTEC Active Sensors Depending on the logger model you can activate up to two internal sensors and four external sensors Simply select the inpu
122. creenshot above you can see two labels Internal Digital Temperature and Int RH At present each label is active meaning the sensor data corresponding to the label is shown on the graph By clicking any of the sensor labels you can hide the data from the graph The label will then be grayed out See the screenshot below Malas Belial RRA De bye TA T a A ANY AYA a hah 20 RAAB 02 45 36 Internal Eee Temperature a Pane Note You can ae al of the sensor labels not plots from the graph by clicking the Plot Legend icon 17 16 Working in Map View The Map View is the main view from which you monitor your connected devices It is in this view that you can see all the icons representing the units in your system Refer to section 17 5 1 for a quick overview of the Map View and section 17 5 5 for a list of all the Map View icons 17 16 1 Loading Map View Wallpaper You can load an image file representing a map of your facility in which the network is operating You can then move the unit icons into their actual positions on the map e Double click on the Map View background to go straight into the Open dialog and locate the image file e Right click on the Map View background to open the context menu and select the option to either Load or Reset the wallpaper Note When deploying the system for the first time it is highly recommended to use a map of the facility to make the deployment work efficiently
123. cting the MicroLogPRO II to the PC 11 2 1 The Data Logger There are two data logger models in the MicroLogPRO II system e EC800 Internal NTC Temperature sensor one external input e EC850 Internal Digital Temperature and Humidity sensors one external input The MicroLogPRO II can be used as a standalone device to monitor temperature and humidity levels It can also be connected via USB cable to the PC for online real time data streaming to the DataSuite software The MicroLogPRO II continuously displays the most recent samples along with the maximum and minimum values for a selected time interval Users can also define minimum and maximum alarm levels via the software for a specific shipment for example and the LCD screen will show alarm icons if either level is breached The logger two button keypad is used to activate and stop the device mark a time stamp and display min max values The data stored by the logger can be downloaded to any computer with DataSuite installed for further viewing and analysis and can also be exported to an Excel spreadsheet The data logger is programmed to consume as little power as possible during operation in order to conserve the battery life When not recording data the units are placed in deep sleep mode and they wake up upon key press The battery for the MicroLogPRO II is easily replaceable and can run up to two years depending on the logger configuration and operating conditions No
124. ction is lost an alarm will be sounded By adding a delay you can mitigate any false alarms The alarm delay can be defined from between one minute to 24 hours with a resolution of one minute lf the DataSuite software is shutdown during a period when alarm delay is being timed i e after a unit has gone offline then the time stamp when the unit went offline will be recorded When the software is reopened if the period of the alarm delay has already passed then an Email SMS notification will be sent If the alarm delay period has not passed then the SMS Email message will be initiated only if the time delay is reached 17 9 3 Email Settings Tab DataSuite s alarm notification feature enables sending of Emails to notify the user of any alarm in the system Clicking the Emails Settings tab will show the following window FORG Preferences Device Settings E Mail Settings SMS Settings Selected Profile Default Profile DataSuite includes one default email account embedded into the software It is called Default Profile based on Gmail POPS server settings It cannot be removed 176 FOURTEC This means that even if you don t configure any email account you are still able to send Email alarm notifications and Boomerang data reports using this profile 1 To edit existing Email profiles or add a new one click Edit The following window is opened Email Profile Manager Profile List De
125. d humidity depending on the specific model Data is recorded and stored to the logger s internal memory and transmitted over the network to the DataSuite software running on the PC The data logger is programmed to consume as little power as possible during operation in order to conserve the battery life When not transmitting or recording data the units are in sleep mode and they wake up when needed The battery for the DBSA710 and DBSA720 is rechargeable and can run up to several months on one charge depending on the logger configuration Refer to section 4 9 7 for more information Note Battery life depends on the logger sampling rate transmission rate type of sensor and number of measured sensors DaqLink Data Loggers Part Number DBSA720 Part Number DBSA710 Four external channel data logger with Four external channel data logger with two internal sensors Humidity and internal Temperature sensor Temperature Memory Capacity 59 000 samples Memory Capacity 59 000 samples Power supply AC or battery operated Power supply AC or battery operated 11 FOURTEC 5 2 2 Hardware Accessories The DagLink system includes the following accessories e Mini USB cable for connecting data logger to PC e Power adapter to power the data logger 78 T FOURTEC Chapter 6 DaqLink Implementation Guide Fourtec recommends first time users of the DaqLink system read this chapter before drilling down into the many
126. da LOOQOETr 2 39 VoguUnNnK 2 50 Micr DOLIG i Unit Status Options e Offline unit is offline and firmware status can t be determined e No update required Unit has latest firmware installed e Uploading firmware file Firmware file is being uploaded to the unit Progress is displayed in percentages e Updating firmware Once firmware file is uploaded then the actual firmware update begins overwriting the existing firmware on the unit e Downloading Logger unit is first downloading all data before beginning the firmware update e Waiting to upload firmware Unit is in a queue to upload the firmware as the network can update two units at a time Unit Information Additional information provided in the Firmware Update Center includes e The unit comment name e Serial number e Current firmware version e Unit status e Update progress 18 2 3 Manual Firmware Update via Map View Icon Each DataSuite supported device including data loggers and DataNet Receivers and Repeaters have the Update Firmware option in its Map View icon context menu DataNet units may have firmware updated wirelessly or via USB Refer to section 18 2 4 for an overview of DataNet USB firmware update 1 To perform a direct update from a specific unit open the context menu and select Update Firmware 2 Enter the password in the Password dialog box 252 3 Depending on the product model a DataSuite system message may prompt you
127. de only the Status menu options will be available Press the Menu button to reach the main menu display Scroll through the main menu options View Data Status using the Scroll button Once you reach the main menu option you need press Enter to select that option and enter the sub menus View Data Menu View Data Note View Data is the default page when the unit is running lf there is more than one sensor running the screen will auto scroll between the sensors showing the sensor name and senor value These are real time displays The display will switch back to the View Data screen after five minutes if none of logger buttons have been pressed If the sensor breached any of the predefined alarm levels then the alarm symbol will be displayed alongside the data reading For example The logger display alarm symbols are e AL HI Alarm High e AL Lo Alarm Low e AL P H Pre Alarm High e AL P L Pre Alarm Low 60 FOURTEC Status Menu Status The Status menu contains the following sub menus all reachable by using the Scroll button The sub menus are outlined below in the order in which they appear on the logger display Name and Status As explained previously the unit name or Comment is displayed on the first row and the second row indicates the logger status If the logger is running then the following screen is displayed Fourtec DataNet Logger running Mark Unit on PC To indicate the log
128. e Current 4 to 20 mA 20 pA LITE5032P RH Voltage 0 to 10 V 5 mV LITE5032P RH Temperature 50 to 150 C 0 3 C LITE5032 EXT NTC 10K Probe 10 2 3 User Defined Sensors DataSuite software provides a simple and straightforward tool for defining a limited number of custom sensors Almost any sensor or transducer with 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA output is accepted by the MicroLite II Current and Voltage loggers universal connectors Electrical units are automatically scaled to meaningful user defined engineering units The sensor definitions are stored in the logger s memory and are added to the sensors list in the Setup window The logger LCD supports the following units for user defined sensors mA V C F PSI BAR PH and PPM These are displayed together with the scaled values All types of user defined engineering units are displayed in the DataSuite software Refer to section 17 8 1 for more details 10 2 1 Sensor Calibration All MicroLite loggers may be calibrated via the DataSuite software The calibration parameters are sent to the data loggers via USB connection and stored in the loggers memory Refer to section 17 20 for more details 10 3 Unit Serial Number and Comment Every MicroLite data logger unit is embedded with a unique serial number The data logger only can be loaded with a descriptive comment to identify its task and location You may add or edit the logger comment via the DataSuite software Eve
129. e DNL920 PA 4 on logger LCD DNL810 47 ga j f FOURTEC Measurement Range Digital Temperature 20 C to 50 C 0 5 C 0 4 C Temperature PT100 20 C to50 C 0 3 C 4 7 2 External Sensor Types DNL910 DNL920 and PA Models Accuracy Logger Model DNL810 BXT DNL920 DNL920 PA DNL810 DNL910 DNL910 PA Each of the four input channels of these data logger models are multi purpose and can be individually configured to any of the following types and ranges Measurement Accuracy Available Inputs Range Current 4 to 20 mA 0 5 Contact Open 0 N A Close 1 Frequency 20 Hz to 4 KHz N A Pulse Counter 1 to 65 536 pulses N A 0 to 4 KHz Temperature PT100 200 to 400 C 200 to 60 C 0 5 2 wire 60 to 400 C 0 5 60 to 60 C 0 3 C Temperature TC J 200 C to 1 000 C 200 to 60 C 0 5 60 to 1 000 C 0 5 60 to 60 C 0 5 C Temperature TC K 200 C to 1 000 C 200 to 60 C 0 5 60 to 1 000 C 0 5 60 to 60 C 0 5 C Temperature TC T 200 C to 400 C 200 to 60 C 0 5 60 to 400 C 0 5 60 to 60 C 0 5 C Voltage Oto1V 0 5 Voltage 0 to 50 mV 0 5 48 In 1 to In 4 In 1 to In 4 In 4 only In 4 only In 1 to In 4 In 1 to In 4 In 1 to In 4 In 1 to In 4 In 1 to In 4 In 1 to In 4 FOURTEC DNL804 and DNL804 BXT Measurement Accuracy Range Current 4 to 20 mA 0 5 DNL808 and DNL808 BXT
130. e Internet connection Activation via an Internet connection on another computer Select if the computer on which DataSuite is running does not currently have Internet connectivity Start trial select to commence the 30 day free trial period and continue working in DataSuite 6 After selecting one of the two available options for continuing with the activation process and after clicking Next in step 4 above you will be prompted to enter the software SN Enter the SN and click Next Note Each serial number provides a single user license for the specific module You cannot use a serial number already registered on another computer 155 FOURTEC 7 The activation process now differs depending on which option was selected in step 4 above Read the relevant section below for further activation instructions Activation via the Internet 1 After entering the software serial number a window requesting basic personal information will open Enter the mandatory fields and click Next r 9 Product Activation DaqLink Personal Information mia pm pm i 5 iq Q m hi ag l 920 l US In order to be able to better assist you in the future we ll appreciate if you take a few minutes to fill out your personal information Name State Company City Email Street Verify Email Zip Phone Country Colombia v Industry Agricultural Secte v Sign up for the weekly newslette
131. e graph This graph is updated in real time with the newly recorded data You can switch between Graph Table and Statistics views to view the data in different formats Figure 34 Online data Graph view 83 Sa gi i Hi HEE at ree e ee c oe ast re _ ry e oe 2 _ 7 Se eeePSeeaeerperereees BRERBEBR RRR R BRR E SE R Figure 36 Online data Statistics view 6 7 2 Logger Tooltip Close the online data window and return to Map View Scroll over the Logger icon and you will see a tooltip displaying the relevant logger information including real time data Logger DBSA720 Serial Number 908390 Fourier Systems LTD Battery Level 100 Version 3 4 1 98 Last Sample Time 26 11 09 19 51 43 Internal Digital Temperature 27 43 C Figure 37 Logger tooltip This tool tip is updated with every newly recorded sample 6 7 3 Sensor View Click the Sensor View icon ia in the tool bar to switch to this view Here you can monitor the data by viewing data display of each individual sensor rather than of each logger D Yr ae File DataNet Network Tools Devices Analysis Report Help B i 4 0 O 26 f befr i amp Figure 38 Sensor view 84 FOURTEC e Ifthe sensor is in alarm the sensor box will change color from green to red just as the Logger icon would e Double clicking the individual sensor box will open the data in
132. e logger to stop logging data Multi Stop Sends a command to multiple loggers to stop logging data Run Sends a command to the logger to start logging data This command will also clear the existing logger memory Multi Run Sends a command to multiple loggers to start logging data This command will also clear the existing logger memory Show Network Path Displays the path of the logger RF data transmission to the Receiver The Transmission Strength legend appears in the bottom right of the screen when this feature is enabled Refer to section 17 7 1 for more details Enable Disable Short Range Repeater Changes the unit between Logger mode and Short Range Repeater SRR mode whereby the logger operates as both a logger and Repeater Note In SRR mode the logger must be connected to AC power at all times as the power consumption is much greater The logger tooltip and logger LCD menu will both indicate that the unit is in SRR mode Remove This option removes from the Map View any icons of loggers that are not on the network anymore and so are irrelevant 190 FOURTEC Turn Off This option will turn the unit off and is password enabled As a precaution to avoid any data loss all data not yet transmitted will first be downloaded to the computer prior to turning the unit off 17 16 7 DataNet Logger Icon Context Menu USB Connection Options When connected to the computer via mini USB cable the DNL910 DNL920 and P
133. e registration Connect Receiver to PC USB port and detect Receiver Form New Network Enter SN to Mini DataNet Device Filter Connect DataNet units to network and update firmware if required Connect sensors and perform logger Setup Deploy loggers with optimal RF reception and power supply Review network paths in software Setup alarm levels and notifications Connect modem Setup Report Send Fourtec network screenshot Post Installation Check List SE oS i Formed a new network at the start of installation Network is locked DataSuite software and device firmware are up to date PC is connected to the Internet All units are online with green network paths Configured alarm levels for relevant inputs 40 T FOURTEC Tested sending of SMS email notifications GSM Modem is connected with the green online icon Atleast 2 x DNR900 one Receiver one Repeater to allow Sub Receiver 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Data files path on PC network is correct Logger battery readings AC power supply is stable All online readings are as expected Configured reports to be sent automatically Software SN has been activated Run Application on Windows Startup in Options is selected Sent DataSuite Map View screenshot to Fourtec support for approval 41 FOURTEC Chapter 4 DataNet Hardware Overview This chapter details the hardware features of the DataNet system components the data loggers and the Receiver Repeater 4
134. e software Logger is downloading data Logger is detected by DataSuite software via direct USB connection Logger is in Stop mode and running from internal 165 EERE F o PD K g FOURTEC battery supply Logger is detected by DataSuite software via direct USB connection Logger is in Stop mode and running from external power supply Logger is detected by DataSuite software via direct USB connection Logger is in Run mode and running from internal battery supply Logger is detected by DataSuite software via direct USB connection Logger is in Run mode and running from external power supply Repeater is online and is running from external power supply Repeater is offline and is no longer detected on the network Its power supply may have failed or it s out of range of the Receiver Repeater is detected by DataSuite software via direct USB connection DaqLink Icons SRE REREERE Logger which has received its Setup but is in Stop mode Running from internal battery supply Logger which has received its Setup but is in Stop mode Running from external power supply Logger in Run mode and running on battery supply Green indicates there are no alarms Logger in Run mode and running on external power supply Green indicates there are no alarms Logger in Run mode with an alarm alert Running from internal battery supply Logger in Run mode with an alarm alert Running from external power supply L
135. e te Frequency 20 Hz to 4 KHz In 4 only Pulse Counter 1 to 65 536 pulses N A In 4 only 0 to 4 KHz Temperature 200 to 400 C 200 to 60 C 0 5 In 1 to In 4 PT100 2 wire 60 to 60 C 0 3 C 60 to 400 C 0 5 Temperature TC J 200 C to 1 000 C 200 to 60 C 0 5 In 1 to In 4 60 to 60 C 0 5 C 60 to 1 000 C 0 5 Temperature TC K 200 C to 1 000 C 200 to 60 C 0 5 In 1 to In 4 60 to 60 C 0 5 C 60 to 1 000 C 0 5 Temperature TC T 200 C to 400 C 200 to 60 C 0 5 In 1 to In 4 60 to 60 C 0 5 C 60 to 400 C 0 5 Voltage Oto1V 0 5 In 1 to In 4 Voltage 0 to 50 mV 0 5 In 1 to In 4 7 3 3 Sensor Connection Connect the sensor s to the terminal block s at the top of data logger a m P Figure 41 DaqLink logger sensor inputs Sensors do not have to be added successively You may only configure In 4 or configure In 1 and In 3 for example when setting up the logger via the software 7 3 4 External PT 100 Sensor Connection The polarity of the Fourtec supplied PT 100 temperature sensor Supporting both DaqLink models for correct wire up to the data logger s terminal blocks is as follows e Two red wires are intertwined and connected together to the negative input e The white wire is connected to the positive input 88 FOURTEC 7 3 5 Programming Limitations for DBSA710 and DBSA720 The standard sampling rate for all sensors on all inputs i
136. e top left corner of the Map View File DataNet Network Tools Devices Analysis Report Help 3 l u a 40 0 eC glclr ee Figure 6 Adding Receiver icon to Map View 6 A green icon indicates that the Receiver is online Note If the Receiver is not recognized by the software try connecting the mini USB cable to another USB port on the PC Or select Devices gt Detect Device in the main menu 7 Should you disconnect the Receiver s USB cable or power adapter and the ii battery eventually dies the Receiver icon will be grayed out K 8 Right click the Receiver icon and select Form New Network from the context menu The Receiver will then form a new network based on your RF environment rather than use the network formed in the factory This will ensure optimal network performance Refer to section 3 8 Optimizing the Network for more details 9 Check the DataNet network ID that was formed by the Receiver by placing the mouse cursor over the Receiver icon The network ID as well as network name Receiver firmware version and unit serial number is displayed 2 Network Name DataNet network Network ID 24 151 20 Receiver DNR900 Serial Number 701347 Version 3 1 2 45 Figure 7 Receiver tooltip Note You can move the Receiver icon elsewhere on the screen by going to Tools gt Lock Map View and unselecting this option 3 5 Adding the Data Logger to the Network Once you have connected your Receiver and esta
137. e unit to appear on the report if any of the logger s are configured to measure temperature 11 Select the Display Alarm Levels on Report option to show on the report graph the actual alarm levels which were configured Using this option you can tell immediately if the measured data strayed above or below the defined alarm levels In the example below you can see the low and high alarm limits and notice that the data is within these limits Sensor Graph Entarnaa Input 11 06 12 16 37 40 11 05 12 18 13 23 camai ibda 7 ST Sth ee i Paia a_a ee m e wee LE oen eee 41 11 I l 11 06 12 16 37 40 11 06 12 18 13 23 12 Next to Report Format select the checkbox next to the required format in which to generate the report Excel PDF or both formats For PDF format select the page size A4 or Letter from the drop down menu 13 Click the Generated Report checkbox to send the report via email to a selected distribution list Click Contacts to open your contact list and select the relevant contacts to receive the report via e mail If your contact list is empty then the Select Contacts window will automatically open when first clicking Generated Report Note To send reports via e mail ensure the DataSuite e mail settings are correctly configured in Tools gt Options gt e mail Settings 14 The DataSuite CFR module provides the ability to send reports for Review and Approval by users with specific privileges to review and
138. ease refer to the table below for DataNet programming limitations where PT100 Thermocouple J K or T A Internal Digital Temperature on B DNL920 Sensor Maximum Sampling Rate Example Setup Combination 3xXA One sample every three seconds In 1 PT 100 4xA In 2 TC J A B In 3 TC J 2x A B One sample every four seconds Internal Temp 3x A B In 1 TC T In 2 PT 100 4x A B One sample every five seconds Internal Temp In 1 TC T In 2 TC J In 3 PT 100 In 4 PT 100 Table 1 Data Logger programming limitations 4 7 6 External Alarm Output The DataNet system supports connection of an external alarm e g siren audible alarm to the Receiver external alarm input or to In 1 of the DNL910 DNL920 and PA model data loggers When connected to the Receiver the external alarm will be activated whenever a logger on the network is in alarm status When connected to the data logger the external alarm will be activated only when that specific logger is in alarm status Once there is no alarm status the external alarm will be deactivated Data Logger External Alarm In 1 of the DNL910 DNL920 and PA models serves either as a standard sensor input or as an external alarm output Configure In 1 as Alarm Normally Open or Alarm Normally Closed in the logger Setup window in the DataSuite software Normally Open will result in the alarm being activated during alarm status the circuit will be closed Normally Closed will resu
139. ed on the top panel of the logger where the antenna is connected and with care pull out the internal compartment containing the logger circuit board and battery 4 Remove and replace the battery ensuring the correct polarity of the battery 5 Push the internal compartment back into place 6 Secure the panel with the two screws Note With the DNL808 also disconnect the external sensor to avoid damaging it 4 9 5 Mini DataNet DNL8XX Data Loggers The Mini DataNet Extended Battery Pack includes a modified plastic casing for the three existing Mini DataNet models This new casing features a battery pack supporting up to 4 x AA 3 6 V batteries for extending the logger s battery life Functionality of this design is no different than the standard loggers 54 FOURTEC With all 4 batteries connected battery life of up to 3 years depending on sampling and transmission rates is expected There is no external power supply for these loggers Note 2 batteries are supplied with every order of a BXT model Replacing the Mini DataNet BXT Battery To replace the batteries on the Mini DataNet loggers follow these instructions 1 Stop the unit from the DataSuite software 2 Turn off the unit using the logger button 3 Remove the screw located on the battery case panel at the bottom of the logger and open the panel to expose the battery pack Se 4 Remove the battery pack taking care not to pull the wires out of place and rep
140. ed separately they each have separate dialogs However the interface is identical and the contacts are stored in the same database The Email SMS Notifications dialog is divided into the following tabs e Notifications Setup e Contacts tab e Groups tab 220 f FOURTEC 17 19 1 Contacts Tab The first step is to create the contacts who shall be receiving the notifications The ability to manage contacts is possible from both the Email and SMS Notifications dialogs 1 Click the Contacts tab and then click Add Contact Name Title Phone number Unknown x E Mail Workday start Workday end Vacation From 14 03 12 Until 1403 12 Number of SMS resends Figure 93 Adding a contact 2 Inthis dialog you must first enter the contact name in the Name field That is the only mandatory field but if you don t enter at least the phone number or Email then they won t receive any alarm notifications The other fields in the dialog are as follows 221 FOURTEC Title Corporate position Phone number The number the DataSuite software will use to send the SMS notification Note The phone number field supports the following characters 0 9 Email The address the DataSuite software will use to send the Email notification Workday Start and End You can define the hours in which the contact will be eligible to receive the notifications i e so they don t receive SMS or Email while
141. ed the user s relevant report sign off Reviewed or Approved will be emailed to the user who generated the report 8 To delete a report click one of the reports in the list and click Delete 9 Click Close to close the Reports Browser window 17 25 Boomerang Report Overview i EO Designed primarily for the goods transportation market loggers running the Boomerang feature are able to automatically deliver a PDF data report via email to predefined contacts when connected to a computer 244 FOURTEC Using the portable MicroLite Il MicroLogPRO II and PicoLite USB loggers you can monitor ambient conditions during a shipment where a data report is required in order to verify the integrity of the shipment The report can be generated at any stage during the shipment when the logger is connected to a computer with DataSuite installed and will include all data recorded up to that stage of the shipment Data is automatically and immediately sent via email to the relevant parties upon connection No configuration is required on the destination computer other than an Internet connection A default email profile is already defined within DataSuite In the event of any breach of defined thresholds relevant action can be taken by onsite personnel in order to ensure the goods reach their markets in optimal conditions 17 25 1 Boomerang Setup Point of Origin When configuring the data logger in order to activate the Boomerang the user
142. emperature sensors e Four channels mA V mV TC K J T PT 100 Pulse Frequency Contact e Includes Power Amplifier for long range transmission e Internal Digital Temperature and Humidity sensors e External battery pack supporting 4 x AA 3 6 V battery 3 year life e External NTC 10 KQO Temperature input with NTC probe e External battery pack supporting 4 x AA 3 6 V battery 3 year life Part Number DBSA710A lt DBSA720A B k LITE5008P A i LITE5032P A i LITE5032P RH A y LITE5032P EXT A f LITE5032P V A f LITE5032P 4 20 A f EC800A EC850A T FOURTEC Product Name DaqLink Data Logger DaqLink Data Logger MicroLite II USB Temp Logger MicroLite II USB Temp Logger MicroLite Il USB Temp RH Logger MicroLite II USB External Temp Logger MicroLite II USB Voltage Logger MicroLite II USB Current Logger MicroLogPRO II Temp Data Logger MicroLogPRO II Temp Data Logger 2 8 Product Description Internal Temperature PT 100 sensor Four channels mA V mV TC K J T PT 100 Pulse Frequency Contact Internal Digital RH and Temperature sensors Four channels mA V mV TC K J T PT 100 Pulse Frequency Contact Internal NTC Temp sensor 8k sample memory Internal NTC Temp sensor 32k sample memory Internal Digital Temp RH sensor 32K sample memory External NTC Temp input 32K sample memory Extern
143. ence on the 2 4 GHz free bandwidth The ZigBee protocol when forming a new network selects the least noisy channel out of 16 available channels Within this channel the units can change RF slots by hopping but cannot move to other channels while running By running on a channel on a network created in another 36 FOURTEC environment e g in the office this channel may become noisy and therefore transmission range may be less than expected e When placing units in an indoor or outdoor environment bear in mind that walls furniture metal objects etc limit the RF coverage thereby reducing the range of the units e Add Repeaters DNR800 or DNR900 in range of end units and parent unit to enhance RF coverage and improve robustness of network Have as many alternative transmission routes as possible in order to eliminate single points of failure e When placing Repeater ensure it is not on the limit of its range to the end unit or parent unit Repeater or Receiver to avoid periods of unavailability due to changing RF conditions e Enable DNL910 or DNL920 logger to work as Short Range Repeaters using the software or deploy DNL910 PA or DNL920 PA loggers which by default operate as both loggers and Repeaters to overcome RF interference nearby the loggers e The higher the Receiver is positioned the better reception quality it will obtain 3 8 3 Showing the Network Path For All Networks By going to DataNet Network gt
144. endix includes mechanical diagrams of the DNL and DNR DataNet models The diagrams include dimensions to be used as a reference for mounting the units on the wall Rear Casing Dimensions for DNL9OXX and DNR9XX Wall Mounting 2 0 Cradle Dimensions for DNL8XX and DNR800 Wall Mounting i CSN a N Pay aA SS t f p 2 1 FOURTEC Appendix G Mini DataNet BXT Assembly Instructions Upgrade Kit Contents e Main plastic body with key pad e Circuit board compartment cover 2 screws e Battery holder compartment cover 1 screw e Battery holder with 2 wires 4 x AA 3 6 V batteries e Sensor strain relief cover 2 screws e 2screws and dibbles for logger wall mounting To convert standard DNL8XX Mini DataNet units to the new DNL8XX BXT featuring the extended battery pack plastic casing follow the instructions below Note Only an authorized Fourtec distributor should perform the BXT conversion 1 Remove the two screws located on the top panel of the standard Mini DataNet logger where the antenna is connected and with care pull out the internal compartment containing the logger circuit board and battery 2 Remove the battery from the circuit board 3 Take the main BXT plastic body from the BXT packaging and gently pull the red and black wires out from the compartment which will house the Mini DataNet circuit board 4 Solder the wires to the circuit board Black wire on
145. eports saved in the Reports folder in the default DataSuite directory e For DataSuite CFR module only assign a Reviewed By or Approved By stamp on each report based on the user s privilege as defined in DatPass Reports are displayed per Profile 1 Goto Reports gt Report Browser in the main menu or click the corresponding icon amp in the upper toolbar The Report Browser window will open 2 Select one of the profiles in the Profiles pane on the left side of the window All reports generated under that profile will appear in the main Report pane 3 Use the Excel PDF Reviewed and Approved checkboxes to filter the reports to be displayed in the Report pane Excel FOF C Reviewed C Approved Report Reviewed Approved ae 11 05 2010 16 05 54 TA 11 05 2010 16 05 54 7 4 To open a report click one of the reports in the list and click Open 5 In DataSuite CFR only to sign the PDF report Excel reports cannot be signed select the specific report The Review and Approve buttons are enabled 6 Depending on the user s assigned privileges click Review or Approve The following dialog will pop up Enter a Comment relating to the read report Sign Report Form o P _ T Please confirm you have read the report before proceeding FDA 21 CFR Par 11 states that each report must be read before marked as Reviewed Approved Comment max 25 characters L 7 Click OK An updated report contain
146. er e Repeater Name Comment When the Repeater is online the following tooltip is displayed Repeater Serial Number 818513 Repeater Connected to AC charging Reception Quality 100 Version 3 1 1 89 In online mode the Repeater also displays e The power status battery left or Connected to AC 196 FOURTEC e Reception quality Strength of RF signal between logger and Receiver e Version Firmware version of Repeater 17 16 14 DaqLink Logger Icon Connection Options Right clicking the DagLink logger icon will give the following options Display Data Displays the logger s data in Graph view The graph displays the data in real time There is also the option to display the data in Table view or to view the data statistics Download Data Downloads all data in the logger memory to the DataSuite software When logger is downloading the data the Logger icon in Map View will appear as follows tD Cancel Download When logger is downloading data you may cancel the download per logger by selecting this menu item Note This feature works only if there are no other commands in the queue following the Download process Reset Alarm When the logger is in a state of alarm this option will reset the alarm state to normal on both the logger and the software The visual and audible alarms will return to normal If after reset the logger is still in alarm conditions then the visible and audible alarms will return Ca
147. er guides refers to the MicroLite II series only Key MicroLite benefits include e High accuracy high functionality low cost data logger e Direct USB interface for setup data download and firmware updates e Unique Boomerang feature that automatically creates and emails PDF data report when logger is connected to PC e Complimentary DataSuite Software for comprehensive data analysis and logger calibration e Rapid data download to Graph Table view and Excel spreadsheet e LCD featuring up to 3 decimal point readings min max data history and battery level indication e LED alarm indicator e Upto 2 year battery life depending on operating conditions and sampling rate e Upto 32 000 sample memory accommodating long haul transports e Magnet key to mark time stamps activate and stop logging e Built in real time clock and calendar e Dust and water resistant depending on logger model e Cradle wall mounting for fixed monitoring 98 FOURTEC 8 2 MicroLite Packaging e Shipped in a carton containing MicroLite data logger and attached cradle wall mounting Nylon bag containing magnet key accessory screws and screw anchors and zip ties for external input models 4 For external input loggers only one terminal block green connected to the external input on the logger cap Each logger packaging also includes a quick start guide to help first time users get set up In order to save battery life t
148. er supply refers to rechargeable or non rechargeable battery packs External power supply refers to 12 VDC 100 to 240 AC adapters When replacing either the battery or AC adapter ensure that the replacement is of the same type and rating as the Fourtec supplied item Refer to the data logger specifications for specific type and rating Please follow the safety instructions below when handling batteries and AC adapters Battery Safety Danger of Explosion The following data loggers use internal non rechargeable lithium batteries and therefore cannot be charged via an external power supply PicoLite MicroLogPRO II MicroLite Mini DataNet e Do not tamper or drop the battery to avoid leakage of hazardous chemicals contained within e Do not puncture incinerate disassemble or expose the battery to temperatures above 122 F 50 C e Keep the battery away from children e Dispose of the battery only in accordance with local regulations concerning potentially hazardous waste Do not throw in the garbage bin e Remove the battery when not using the data loggers for a significant period of time e g when placed in long term storage AC Power Adapter Safety e Use the AC adapter provided by Fourtec or another adapter of the same type and rating as the original e Verify that your power outlet is suitable for the voltage of the AC adapter e lf the AC adapter is connected to an AC outlet make sure the area around the outle
149. ernal AC power supply Note The PA power amplifier models must be connected to AC power at all times due to the high power consumption of these units Depending on the logger configuration from a fully charged battery the non PA data logger can run for up to several months Refer to section 4 9 7 for more details on battery life Note Charge the data logger units for 16 hours before using them for the first time When connected to external power supply the data logger battery will not be charged when the unit is turned off This will allow the system to protect the battery from overheating First Time Charging From a fully drained battery you must charge the battery for 16 hours to bring it to a full charge Once the charge cycle is complete the logger will run from the external power supply without draining or charging the internal battery In order to maintain FOURTEC a fully charged battery and ensure the battery doesn t self discharge the battery charger will daily charge the unit for a minute to maintain the battery capacity Note Before storing the DataNet units make sure you have unplugged all the sensors and turned the units off via the keypad Standard Charging When a logger is reconnected to the AC charger it will begin the 16 hour charge cycle no matter what the status of the battery Once the charging cycle is complete the logger will run from external power supply The one exception to this scenario is i
150. etect Device in the main menu 2 Data download should begin automatically To manually download data right click the logger icon and select Download Data 3 View the downloaded data by double clicking the logger icon 128 FOURTEC Chapter 13 MicroLogPRO II Hardware Overview This chapter details the hardware features of the MicroLogPRO II data loggers 13 1 Data Logger Front Panel Layout LCD screen Cradle for wall mounting Min Max Hours button Mini USB input Micro ooPRO Il External sensor input Bi color LED Figure 59 EC800 data logger front panel LCD screen Cradle for wall mounting Min Max Days button g Min Max Hours button i hel MAU Mini USB input nme LogPRO It External sensor input RH Temp sensor Bi color LED location Figure 60 EC850 data logger front panel LCD screen Displays logger status logger data alarm level Min Max values and engineering units Min Max Hours button Use to view Min Max values going back 24 hours Also used to wake up logger from sleep mode Min Max Days button Use to view Min Max values going back 30 days Also used together with Min Max Hours button to perform other logger functionality 129 Ww Bi color LED Green and red LED Indicates activation logging and alarm status Cradle for wall mounting Use the cradle to mount the logger on a wall for stationary operation Screws are provided in the accessorie
151. f the charger is reconnected within an hour of disconnection and the battery level is at least 90 In this situation the charging process will not restart Effect of Charging Battery on Temperature Sensor For loggers measuring data with the internal temperature sensor it is critical to note that during the charge cycle the logger will heat up thereby causing the internal temperature sensor reading to rise by up to 10 C above ambient temperature Once the charging process is complete the logger will cool down and the internal temperature sensor readings will return to normal For loggers remaining connected to AC power to prevent the logger from heating up again following the initial charge cycle the logger will receive a one minute trickle charge each day rather than stay continually charged This is sufficient to ensure the logger doesn t self discharge and will maintain the loggers full charge status 4 9 4 Mini DataNet DNL8XX BXT Data Loggers The Mini DataNet loggers are powered by non rechargeable internal 2 3 AA lithium batteries There is no external power supply for these loggers Depending on the logger configuration the battery can last up to 10 months before they need to be replaced Replacing the Mini DataNet Battery To replace the batteries on the Mini DataNet loggers follow these instructions 1 Stop the unit from the DataSuite software 2 Turn off the unit using the logger button 3 Remove the two screws locat
152. f this option is selected the unit will first leave the network and then reset itself The scan network procedure described in section 4 12 3 will begin The only exception to this procedure is that even if the last connected network is found during the scan the unit will not automatically connect to it Leave network 73 FOURTEC Reset Unit When the unit is reset upon start up it will automatically scan for networks The unit will automatically connect to the previously connected network assuming it was found in the network scan Turn Off Unit selecting this option will shut the unit down You can turn the unit on again by pressing the Scroll button It is recommended to turn off the unit when it is not in use Turn off unit Note Turning off the Repeater can have adverse affects on your network as other units may be dependent on the Repeater for transmitting its data to the Receiver To prevent the Repeater from being a point of failure if shut off ensure the network is robust enough by having alternative routes for the end units to reach the Receiver 4 15 5 Additional Repeater Screens Unit Beep When the DataSuite software activates the Call Unit feature the Repeater will beep and the following screen will be displayed Unit Beep Fourtec DataNet Refer to section 17 16 5 for more details No Parent Signal No Parent Found When a Repeater s parent unit such as another Repeater or the Receiver goes of
153. fault Profile Profile Name Default Profile fourtec datasuite net smtp gmail com Fort 465 Server timeout 30 seconds Use authentication login Server requires SSL Username fourttec datasuitemail com Password PTT Tri iiii Test Email Figure 81 Options gt Email Settings tab You can view the Profile settings here Note that the Default profiles are un editable 2 To add anew custom profile click Add A new entry named New Profile is created Click on this entry to edit the settings server information etc Make sure to enter the fields correctly e g with no extra spaces or typos 3 When finished click OK to return to the main Email Settings window displaying the list of profiles 4 To remove a profile from the Profile List click Remove from the Email Profile Manager window Note that the default profile cannot be removed Note DataSuite supports SMTP and MIME encoding and POP3 mail protocols Sending a Test Email To send a test Email to verify the Email configuration is correct 1 Once the Email profile configuration is complete click Test Email to open the Contact Information dialog 2 Select a contact from the DataSuite contact list or enter an Email address Click OK to send the test Email 3 The test Email will contain the following content Subject Test message sent from the DataSuite software 177 FOURTEC Body This is a test message sent from the DataSuite software Sent on the
154. features of the system described later in the user guide The Implementation Guide will give you a clear understanding of the basic aspects of setting up the system and getting the data logger up and running 6 1 Pre setup Requirements Prior to commencing with the DagLink implementation you must have the following requirements in place PC e 24 7 availability if online data monitoring is required e Reliable AC power e Sufficient hard disk space to store loggers data e One free USB port DaqLink devices At least one DagLink logger DBSA710 or DBSA720 Mini USB cable The mini USB cable connects the data logger to the PC for logger configuration and data download and is supplied with the DataSuite software kit 6 2 Launching the Software 1 Install the DataSuite software on the PC workstation Refer to section 17 1 Installing DataSuite Software on page 150 for more details 2 Once the software and associated components have been installed launch ra DataSuite from your DataSuite desktop shortcut 3 The main DataSuite window is launched The default view is called Map View 79 Figure 31 Main DataSuite window 4 Check for DataSuite updates Go to Help gt Check for Updates from the DataSuite main menu to check for newer versions of the DagLink module software and firmware released since you purchased your system For more details on the Update feature go to Chapter 18 Updating DataSuite Software and
155. flexible and reliable nature of the protocol With the Mesh Network system the ZigBee standard redresses misbalances in any data logging system responding to weaknesses inefficiencies new network structure with the additional or removal of devices through self correction 2 4 The DataNet System The basic DataNet system will contain at least one of the following units e DataNet data logger Part Number DNL804 DNL808 DNL810 DNL804 BXT DNL808 BXT DNL810 BXT DNL910 DNL920 DNL910 PA DNL920 PA e Receiver Repeater unit Part Number DNR900 e Mini Repeater Part Number DNR800 e Mini USB cable e Power adapter one per DataNet unit ordered e DataSuite Software CD with unique serial number 2 4 1 The Data Logger There are seven distinct data logger models compatible with the DataNet system These are the so called end units of the system These loggers support up to four external sensors and two internal sensors temperature and humidity depending on the specific model Data is recorded and stored to the logger s internal memory and transmitted over the network to the DataSuite software running on the PC The data logger is programmed to consume as little power as possible during operation in order to conserve the battery life When not transmitting or recording data the units are in sleep mode and they wake up when needed The battery for the DNL910 and DNL920 is rechargeable and can run up to several months on one
156. fline then the following screen is immediately displayed on the logger No Parent signal For example this could happen if the Receiver managing the network has formed a new network so there is no Receiver managing the previous network Or if the parent unit is a Repeater and it goes offline then this Repeater will display the message above Once it has determined that the parent signal is lost it will try to establish a connection with the network via another Repeater but if it fails then the following screen is displayed Fourtec No Parent found You will have to leave the current network and rescan for a new network 74 FOURTEC Loading Firmware When updating the firmware of the Repeater via the software s Firmware Update Center the Repeater screen will display the update progress When complete the main Repeater screen will be displayed Loading firmware Progress 55 4 15 6 Working in Substitute Receiver Mode In the event that the network Receiver suffers hardware failure is damaged or cannot operate for any reason the DataNet network cannot function as an online monitoring system In such an event any network with a functioning Repeater can restore network functionality i e transmission of data from logger to software by using the Repeater to temporarily replace the Receiver By doing so the Repeater will be defined as a Substitute Receiver maintaining the Original network ID and full Receiver functional
157. for DataNet and DagLink Loggers 17 20 7 Calibrating the External PT 100 Sensor Input 17 20 8 Calibrating Thermocouple Inputs 17 20 9 Saving and Loading DataNet and DagLink Calibration Settings 17 20 10 New Calibration Mechanism when Updating MicroLite and MicroLogPRO II Firmware 17 21 Analyzing the Data 17 21 1 Using the Graph Features 17 21 2 Viewing Time Stamps 17 21 38 Changing the Graph Table or Statistics View Header 17 21 4 Statistical Analysis 17 22 Exporting Data to Excel or CSV Formats 17 23 Printing the Data 17 24 Reports Module 17 24 1 Creating a Report Profile 17 24 2 Report Types 17 24 3 Removing a Report Profile 17 24 4 The Report Browser 17 25 Boomerang Report Overview 17 25 1 Boomerang Setup Point of Origin 17 25 2 Boomerang Setup Destination Computer 17 25 3 Boomerang Email and Report Examples 232 232 236 23 238 CHAPTER 18 UPDATING DATASUITE SOFTWARE AND FIRMWARE 18 1 Using the Uptodata Client 18 2 Updating Device Firmware 18 2 1 Downloading the Firmware File 18 2 2 Using the Firmware Update Center 18 2 3 Manual Firmware Update via Map View Icon 18 2 4 DataNet Firmware Update via USB 18 2 5 Cancelling Firmware Update 18 2 6 Interrupted Firmware Update APPENDIX A DATANET SPECIFICATIONS 18 3 DNR900 DNL910 DNL920 PA Unit Outputs 18 4 Logger Input Specifications DNL910 DNL920 and PA models 18 5 Mini DataNet Sensor Specifications 18 6 General
158. for each day that the logger is recording data The file name format is the date followed by the file extension e g 2007 12 30 dat The data is saved automatically by the software There is no need for the user to save the data manually For applications where the data is being streamed online directly to the software the data file is saved as follows e Every 15 minutes e When the software is closed e When the user opens an archived data file the file is updated with all data not saved to that point You can also save the data in a text file format Refer to section 17 9 1 for more details 17 14 Viewing Archived Offline Data The user can view the logger data online or can choose to open archived data of one or more loggers including loggers of different models Archived data is all data that was logged by a specific logger and recorded by the software into the DataSuite directory on the PC Follow the instructions below to open archived data 1 Click the Open icon to launch the Open Data Files dialog 2 Using the calendar define the date and time period for which you wish to view your data 3 Select the logger from the list of loggers in the dialog The loggers can be listed in ascending or descending order according to logger serial number or comment by clicking the relevant header Click OK to view the data Note The DataSuite data file path is displayed at the top of the Open Data Files dialog 184 24 12 2
159. for the Repeater to send all of its data Note The signal level may be low but the link quality can still be 100 You will not be able to run the Signal Level test when the Repeater has lost its connection to the network If you tried then the following screens are displayed No Parent signal Fourtec DataNet No Parent found 72 FOURTEC Firmware Version This menu informs the user of the Repeater firmware version This is helpful when you need to upgrade the system firmware to check the current version Or when contacting Fourtec technical support with any technical issues Firmware version 1 03 01 02 30 00 The firmware version is commonly referred to by the numbers in bold in the screen above For example the firmware version which is supported by this user guide is v2 30 S N This menu displays the unit s eight digit SN S N 12345678 Network Data This menu displays the unique network ID to which the unit is currently connected This ID will match the network ID displayed in the software in the Receiver icon s tooltip in the Map View Network data ID 014 061 082 Go to Substitute Receiver Mode Refer to section 4 15 6 for more details Change Unit Type to Receiver Select this option to change your unit from Repeater to Receiver mode A new network ID will be formed Change unit type to Receiver Press the Enter button to proceed with changing the unit to Receiver mode Leave Network I
160. g select the contact and or group that will receive the notification 7 Youcan also click Check All to select all the sensor alarms for notification 223 f FOURTEC Note If the DataNet logger transmission rate is slower than the sampling rate an alarm notification is still sent even if the logger transmission time hasn t passed For example if the sampling rate is every 5 minutes and the transmission rate is every 10 minutes if a logger reaches a high alarm after 7 minutes a notification will be sent The system won t wait until the scheduled transmission time 17 19 4 Email and SMS Notification Formats Email Notification Format When the Email notification is sent the recipient receives the Email in the following format Email Header DataNet Alarm Internal Temperature High Alarm Value Detected 25 47C Email Body DataNet Alarm Comment Factory 1 F S N 808932 08 07 09 13253741 Internal Temperature Low Alarm Value Detected 25 47 C The Email header contains the sensor type last recorded sample and alarm type In addition the Email body contains the logger comment serial number time stamp of last sample and value of last sample SMS Notification Format When the SMS notification is sent the recipient receives the SMS in the following format The logger comment is displayed in the first row S N 515244 Test 810 2 Int Temperature 15 1 10 17 25 High Alarm Value Detected 24 24C
161. ge into the DataSuite software showing a map of your facility in order to place the Logger icons in their relative positions As you deploy more standalone loggers this will prove very helpful e Double click the Map View background to browse to the image directory and load the image Remember to unlock the Map View in order to move the icons around e Right click the Map View background and two options will be available Load Wallpaper and Reset Wallpaper which resets to the default Fourtec wallpaper 103 f FOURTEC 9 5 Configuring the Logger Once the software has detected the MicroLite logger you must configure the unit in order to start acquiring data 1 Right click on the Logger icon Select Setup from the context menu The Setup window will be launched Setup for MicroLite Il Voltage 0 10V 32K 9137325 Properties Sensors Power Saving Settings Boomerang Report Identifiers SN 9137325 Comment Fourtec Device MicroLite I Voltage 0 10 Firmware Battery level 1 Options Cyclic run IT Stop on cap removal Show Min Max samples on LCD F Push to run fi C Only past 24h F Timer Run 08 47 15 Stop on key press Sampling Rate Interval 00 01 00 Averaging points 1 vy Samples Recording time 22 05 20 00 days hh mm ss Setup amp Run a Setup Close Figure 46 MicroLite IlI Logger Setup window This dialog provides non editable information such as the serial number
162. ger Value per Point e The Reference Value is the reading of the reference measuring device e g climate chamber electrical calibrator etc for the input you need to calibrate e The Logger Value is the reading of the specific logger input recorded at the same exact time as the Reference value This value can be obtained by referring to the logger data graph while the logger was running or taken online directly from the Logger Data pane when performing online calibration Calibration Reference Value Logger Value Point 1 0 0 Copy Point 2 40 40 Coy Figure 97 Two point calibration window Calibration Reference Value Logger Value Point 1 10 10 Copy Point 2 20 20 Copy Point 3 50 50 Copy Figure 98 Three point calibration window 1 Enter the Reference Value and corresponding Logger Value for each point Note If you are performing an online calibration e g using a calibrator the logger displays the value to be calibrated press the Copy button to copy the real value to the Logger Value text box 2 Press Send Calibration to send these values to the logger 3 If performing an online calibration you can compare the real value in the Logger Data pane to the reference value If the values are within an acceptable margin of error you may close the Calibration window or move on to calibrate additional inputs 4 If performing an offline calibration you must run the logger again in order to verif
163. ger icon in the software s Map View press the Enter button when this screen is displayed The logger s icon located in the Map View will blink a number of times Batt Level battery level If the power adapter is not connected the battery percentage will be displayed If the power adapter is connected Battery charging will be displayed Batt Level 67 Batt Level Battery charging Signal Level Test The Signal Level test allows the user to check the signal strength and quality of the link between the logger and its parent unit This test is used to determine optimal positioning of the logger during deployment Signal level Run test gt Menu By pressing the Menu button the unit will show the signal level and link quality in percentage terms lf there is no connection with a parent unit an Out of range message will be displayed Signal level 80 Out of range Link quality 95 61 FOURTEC e Signal level Indicates the reception level between end unit and parent unit If the level falls below 20 then the logger should be placed in a better location or a Repeater should be added e Link quality Calculation of the data transmitted with no errors from the logger to the parent unit If the level falls between 85 then the logger should be placed in a better location or a Repeater should be added The lower the link quality the more retries are needed in order for the logger to send all of its data Note The signal
164. gging or Setup if you wish to run the logger later 7 The Logger icon will appear as follows when in Run mode jo 8 To stop the logger right click the Logger icon and select Stop from the context menu Note Running the logger clears the logger memory All previously recorded data will be erased when you begin a new logging session 15 6 Viewing Data Once you run the logger you have several ways of viewing the online data that is being acquired e Online graph table statistics views e Logger icon tooltip e Sensor view 15 6 1 Online Data Views Double clicking the Logger icon or selecting Display Data in the Logger icon context menu will open the online graph This graph is updated in real time with the newly recorded data You can switch between Graph Table and Statistics views to view the data in different formats 143 Cometic STRUT x 74 t i ee t th tte trad tek Teen TCL Mee ck burs Dyes lopna DURT kapag fel ere DNS MAB EIS SE 4S tor tere Figure 66 Online data Graph view fe he A degra ee Tabie prp Ioaz EnA 190312 ttd nanena Bonze MBAM onena HOD 2 RIN 130312 att EPEPEYE pnr enp 130312 18 01 90 EE r E ENTE Iaster VOD 12 1811 5 130812 12 138 t3017 tet ERATE niina arz mia en T 130522 ta Be aaa RPa amp eoHS gt on FORTE GS oe Sensor Minenumn Maximum Average Statistics start Statistics end fortectet temai Dots C B
165. green terminal block is attached to the external logger cap for the 101 FOURTEC Chapter 9 MicroLite Implementation Guide Fourtec recommends first time users of the MicroLite system read this chapter before drilling down into the many features of the system described later in the user guide The Implementation Guide will give you a clear understanding of the basic aspects of setting up the system and getting the data logger up and running 9 1 Pre setup Requirements Prior to commencing with the MicroLite implementation you must have the following requirements in place PC e 24 7 availability if online data monitoring is required e Reliable AC power e Sufficient hard disk space to store loggers data e One free USB port MicroLite devices At least one MicroLite logger 9 2 Launching the Software 1 Install the DataSuite software on the PC workstation Refer to section 17 1 Installing DataSuite Software on page 150 for more details 2 Once the software and associated components have been installed launch hewwpately DataSuite from your DataSuite desktop shortcut Bese Alte 3 The main DataSuite window is launched The default view is called Map View ee T M os ee w b 0 9 A LEE T tary Figure 44 Main DataSuite window 102 f FOURTEC 4 Check for DataSuite updates Go to Help gt Check for Updates from the DataSuite main menu to check for newer versions of the MicroLite m
166. gured in your network You must define the alarm notifications for each unit in turn Select the first unit you wish to define The Email or SMS tab is now active for the unit selected in step 1 above In this tab select the type of alarm for which the notification should be sent in the event that the predefined alarm level is breached Only the sensors which were configured in the logger Setup with alarms levels are enabled in this tab In addition any online DataNet Repeater will be enabled for sending battery alarm or reception alarm notifications t aco 0 MOO E lafi ton its paat Daga Ve Figure 95 SMS and Email notification setup Select the checkboxes according to the type of sensor alarm for which notifications should be sent You may also select the following alarms a Battery alarm Notification will be sent for low battery alarm when battery level is at or drops below 10 When the battery level goes above 10 again when unit is connected to AC power another email notification is sent stating the battery is charging b Reception alarm For DataNet units an Offline alarm notification will be sent when there is no RF reception from a unit When the unit is back online an online notification is sent c Normalized Notification will be sent when the logger return to normal levels having been in alarm Click the Contact button adjacent to each of the sensors which have defined alarms In the Select Contact dialo
167. halfway due to the unit shutting down for example the unit will not lose its current firmware and so will continue to be operable 7 When the upload begins the Firmware Update Center status will change to Uploading firmware file and the unit display will read Loading firmware The progress will also be displayed on both hardware and software Status Progress Uploading firmware file Requires an update 8 When the upload is complete the unit will reset and the Firmware Update Center will display the status No update required The firmware version will be updated as well 251 f FOURTEC Note You can quit the firmware update at any time by unselecting the Update checkbox in the Update Center 9 When the unit resets it will automatically rejoin the network for DataNet units or reconnect via USB and will be in Stop mode However the unit configuration will still be saved For loggers which have completed firmware update run the logger to start recording data again Checking Available Firmware Versions 1 Available firmware versions are displayed at the top of the Firmware Update Center dialog The information is taken from the firmware file Firmware dfw stored in the DataSuite directory The same firmware file is used for all units Available Firmware Versions DataNet Repeater Receiver 240 Mini DataNet Data Logger 2 35 MicroLogPRO H 116 ry t t a Alp sF I ne 9e ora iral Er l a Ai lie Vict at iet Dai
168. he battery life of the logger LCD Configuration e Always On The LCD will always remain on during logging e On for 30 60 or 120 seconds on key press and alarm Selecting one of these options will result in the LCD coming on for the defined period after the logger keypad is pressed or after an alarm is reached After the defined number of seconds the logger LCD will shut off again Even if the LCD is off the logger is continually recording data LED Configuration Selecting this option will disabling the LED during alarm state so there is no LED indication LED alarm indication is generally enabled when the LCD is not configured to be always on so the user will always be able to see that the logger is or was in alarm state Disabling this feature will also help to prolong battery life 17 17 5 PicoLite Properties Sensor and Display Setup The PicoLite Setup window includes the following tabs Properties Sensors and Boomerang Report They contain the same parameters for both products Refer to section 17 25 on page 244 for more details regarding the Boomerang feature The main logger configuration is performed on the Properties tab The Sensor and Alarm setup is performed on the Sensors tab 214 f FOURTEC Setup for PicoLite 123456 E gt Sensors Boomerang Report Identifiers SN 123456 Comment PicoLite Device PicoLite Firmware Battery level 85 Temperature Scale Celsius Fahrenheit Options
169. he MicroLite s are shipped in Stop mode This means that before you can start recording you must first connect the logger to the computer and set it up using the DataSuite software 8 2 1 The Data Logger The MicroLite II family includes six models e LITE5008P and LITE5032P MicroLite II Internal Temperature 8K or 32K sample memory models e LITE5032P RH MicroLite Il Internal Temperature RH e LITE5032P 4 20 MicroLite Il External 4 20 mA e LITE5032P V MicroLite Il External 0 10 V e LITE5032P EXT MicroLite Il External NTC Temperature The MicroLite LCD screen continuously displays the most recent samples and users can also define minimum and maximum alarm levels via the software for a specific shipment for example The LCD screen will also show alarm icons if either level is breached 99 reo T FOURTEC The accompanying magnet key is used to activate and stop the device and mark a time stamp The data stored by the MicroLite can be downloaded to any computer with DataSuite installed for further viewing and analysis and can also be exported to an Excel spreadsheet The data logger is programmed to consume as little power as possible during operation in order to conserve the battery life When not recording data in Stop mode the units are placed in deep sleep mode after two minutes The LCD will turn off The units wake up upon connection to USB or by using the magnet key The MicroLite battery is easily rep
170. he configuration process Click Finish to launch the application 153 FOURTEC 13 Once the module is launched connect the device to a USB port on your computer It will automatically detect the logger as new hardware and the device will appear as a new icon in the DataSuite Map View 17 2 DataSuite Software Activation DataSuite requires certain modules to be activated using a serial number provided with purchase of the specific DataSuite module e DataSuite DN DataNet e DataSuite DQL DagLink e DataSuite CFR CFR module e DataSuite for MicroLite MicroLlogPRO II and PicoLite is free of charge and does not require activation Each module can run for 30 days in Trial mode but when this 30 period is over the user will not be able to operate the software until a valid serial number is registered Note The software activation feature protects Fourtec s intellectual property for both its software and hardware Please note that e Each serial number is good for unlimited installations on a single computer You cannot install the software using the same serial number on another computer If you have replaced your computer and must reinstall DataSuite using the same serial number contact Fourtec Customer Support for assistance e Activation can be performed from the computer with DataSuite installed or if there is no Internet connection from that computer then via another computer with Internet connectivity e C
171. iMh rechargeable battery To charge the internal battery connect the unit to the AC power supply supplied with the DNR900 The internal battery pack is generally used as a backup power supply in the event the external power supply fails Note When in Receiver mode the unit must be connected to external power at all times While running on internal power the unit will run for only several hours before shutting down and therefore shutting down the DataNet network which the Receiver is managing 4 9 2 DNR800 and DNR9OO in Repeater Mode The DNR800 must be connected to external AC power at all times This device does not have an internal battery so when the external power supply is disconnected the unit will shutdown When in Repeater mode the DNR900 must be connected to external AC power at all times using the supplied AC charger Otherwise when the internal backup batteries drains and shuts down the unit all the end units dependent on the Repeater to transmit to the Receiver will not be detected by the software The user won t be able to monitor data readings from these units until the Repeater comes back online When connected to external power supply the Repeater battery will not be charged when the unit is turned off This will allow the system to protect the battery from overheating 4 9 3 DNL910 and DNL920 Data Loggers The DNL910 DNL920 and PA data loggers run from an internal NiMh rechargeable battery as well as from ext
172. iew and select the Cancel Firmware Update option 254 FOURTEC lf a data logger was in Run mode prior to the firmware update when cancelling it the logger will resume operation in Stop mode 18 2 6 Interrupted Firmware Update There are several ways an in progress firmware update may be interrupted e Unselecting the checkbox next to the unit name in the Firmware Update Center e Disconnecting the USB from the Receiver e Disconnecting the USB from the device during USB firmware update e Exiting the DataSuite software In each case when the unit is back online the firmware update will automatically resume from the beginning of the update If a data logger s firmware update was interrupted and it was in Run mode prior to the update the logger will continue to run even after the interruption 200 FOURTEC Appendix A DataNet Specifications 18 3 DNL910 DNL920 and PA Models External Inputs Four external inputs with selectable sensor type for each input e 4to 20 mA e OtoiV e 0to50mV e PT 100 2 wire e Contact Open Closed e Thermocouple J K or T e Pulse counter Input 4 only e Frequency Input 4 only e User defined sensors DNL804 External Input Current 4 to 20 mA DNL808 External Input NTC 10 KO DNL810 External Input None Alarm Output Output 1 Open collector Close position resistance 50 Q Max Load 50 mA 3 V DC DNR900 DNL910 DNL920 PA Unit Outputs Internal Inputs
173. ifications 18 8 Data Logger Input Types DBSA710 and DBSA720 External Inputs Internal Inputs Four external inputs with selectable sensor DBSA710 type for each input e PT 100 Temperature amp aie DBSA720 e Oto1V e Oto50mV e PT 100 2 wire e Contact Open Closed e Thermocouple J K or T e Digital Temperature e Digital Relative Humidity e Pulse counter Input 4 only e Frequency Input 4 only e User defined sensors 18 9 DBSA710 and DBSA720 Outputs Alarm Output Output 1 External Power Excitation transducers usage Open collector 12 VDC 300 mA Close position resistance 50 Q Reset fuse overload protection Max Load 50 mA 3 V DC 18 10 Logger Input Specifications DBSA710 and DBSA720 Internal PT 100 Internal Digital Internal Digital Temperature Temperature Relative Humidity DBSA710 DBSA720 DBSA720 Type PT 100 Type Digital sensor Range 5 to 95 RH Range 20 to 50 C Range 20 to 50 C Resolution 0 5 RH Resolution 0 1 C Resolution 0 1 C Accuracy Accuracy 0 3 C Accuracy 0 5 C 3 RH DataSuite software 4 RH Logger LCD 262 Temperature Thermocouple J Range 200 to 1 000 C Resolution 0 1 C Accuracy 200 to 60 C 0 5 60 to 60 C 0 5 C 60 to 1 000 C 0 5 Cold junction compensation 0 3 C Temperature PT 100 2 wire Range 200 to 400 C Resolution 0 1 C Accuracy 200 to 60 C 0 5 60 to 60 C 0 3 C 60 to 4
174. ill be displayed Unit Beep Fourtec DataNet Refer to section 17 16 5 for more details 63 FOURTEC No Parent Signal When a logger s parent unit such as a Repeater or Receiver goes offline then the following screen is immediately displayed on the logger No Parent signal For example this could happen if the Receiver managing the network has formed a new network so there is no Receiver managing the previous network Or if the parent unit is a Repeater and it goes offline then the logger will display this message Once it has determined that the parent signal is lost it will try to establish a connection with the network via another Repeater but if it fails then the following screen is displayed Fourtec DataNet No Parent found You will have to leave the network and rescan for a new network Loading Firmware When updating the firmware of the data logger via the software s Firmware Update Center the logger screen will display the update progress When complete the main logger status screen will be displayed Also refer to Chapter 18 Updating DataSuite Software and Firmware Loading firmware Progress 55 Note Logger must be in Stop mode before firmware can be updated 64 f 4 13 Operating the Mini DataNet DNL8XX DNL8XX BXT and DNR800 This section explains how to operate the DNL804 DNL808 DNL810 DNL8XX BXT and DNR800 Mini DataNet units using the multi functional button on the logger front panel
175. ill scroll through the days starting from d 1 d 2 and so on Once you ve reached the desired number release the left button 2 Once the left button is released the logger will display the Min and Max values of the sensors for the selected time period including Dew Point 13 9 7 Sensor Alarm Levels Via the software users can define minimum and maximum alarm levels for each input individually The MicroLogPRO II logger display indicates when any alarm level is exceeded Note When the MicroLogPRO II is in Cyclic mode the Low or High alarm level displayed represents the lowest or highest readings recorded since the logger starting logging data irrelevant of how many cycles the logger has recorded AL L A sensor s reading is ower than its low alarm level AL H A sensor s reading is higher than its high alarm level The alarm notification remains until the next time you change the logger setup or run a new recording session 137 T FOURTEC Chapter 14 PicoLite Overview This chapter provides a general overview of the PicoLite data logger 14 1 PicoLite Introduction PicoLite Data Logger icol a i 5 f Part Number PICOLITE 16K Internal temperature sensor 40 to 40 C and USB interface Memory Capacity 16 000 samples Power supply Battery operated The compact and easy to use disposable PicoLite USB data logger provides a simple solution for temperature monitoring throughout mass tr
176. is found Scenario 2 When the system scans for networks and finds the last network that it was connected to it will automatically connect to the last known network Joined Network ID 021 207 175 As in Scenario 1 the logger display will then return to the welcome message displaying the unit name and status Scenario 3 The system can t find any networks at all If no networks were found the unit will display the following screens Scan for network Scan complete No found networks Found 0 network Rescan networks Scenario 4 The unit found a network but failed to join The unit will perform up to 99 retries to join the network before scanning for networks again Press any of the unit buttons to cease the attempts to join the network A unit may fail to join a network if it is far from the Receiver requiring several hops to reach the Receiver or the network itself is large with many units The attempt to join a network is made in under a second in real time and on high traffic network it may result in failure to join Moving the unit closer to the Receiver can help the logger to join successfully If the logger still can t join form a new network or contact Fourtec technical support 4 15 4 Menu Options Use the Scroll button to scroll through the menu options Name and Status The unit name is displayed on the first row and the second row indicates the Repeater status Fourtec DataNet Ready 7
177. is not recognized by the software try connecting the logger to another USB port on the PC Ensure the unit is turned on and select Devices gt Detect Device again in the main menu 5 Should you disconnect the logger s USB cable the logger icon will be grayed out Note You can move the logger icon elsewhere on the screen by going to Tools gt Lock Map View and unselecting this option 15 4 Loading Map View Background lf relevant to the PicoLite application you can load an image into the DataSuite software showing a map of your facility in order to place the Logger icons in their relative positions As you deploy more standalone loggers this will prove very helpful e Double click the Map View background to browse to the image directory and load the image Remember to unlock the Map View in order to move the icons around 141 F FOURTEC e Right click the Map View background and two options will be available Load Wallpaper and Reset Wallpaper which resets to the default Fourtec wallpaper 15 5 Configuring the Logger Once the software has detected the PicoLite logger you must configure the unit in order to start acquiring data 1 Right click on the Logger icon Select Setup from the context menu 2 The Setup window will be launched Setup for PicoLite 123456 Properties Sensors Boomerang Report Identifiers SN 123456 Comment PicoLite logger Device PicoLite Firmware Battery level 88 Te
178. ity except for the ability to add new loggers to the network Until a new permanent Receiver is obtained this feature provides an excellent backup enabling continuous data transfer preventing the time consuming task of moving all devices to a new network To enable Substitute Receiver mode 1 Ensure the original network Receiver is switched off 2 Connect the Repeater to the PC via mini USB cable 3 From the Repeater menu select Go to Substitute Receiver mode 4 TheLCD screen will display Sub Receiver and the network ID To move to standard Repeater mode select Change unit type to Repeater from the menu 4 16 Data Logger Memory Management All DataNet data loggers operate using a cyclic memory mechanism When the logger memory is full the logger will not stop recording data It will continue by writing over the first samples recorded to the logger memory As DataNet is an online monitoring system the logger data is regularly transmitted to the Receiver so any erased samples will already be safely recorded to the DataNet data file folders The only scenario where data may be erased is if the Receiver is offline for a period longer than the data logger s Recording Time as displayed in the Setup dialog The Recording Time indicates how long the logger can record data for until the memory is full In this case the logger memory will fill up and due to the cyclic mechanism start erasing the first recorded samples Any samples
179. k Note Once you change the Receiver to a Repeater you will only be able to download data from loggers on the Receiver s network via direct USB connection or by using the Substitute Receiver feature see section 4 15 6 Once the unit is in Repeater mode you will need to leave the network it is connected to and scan for a new network Only once the Repeater joins the network will other units on that network detect it Refer to section 4 15 for more details on operating a Repeater and joining a new network 68 f FOURTEC 4 14 4 Additional Receiver Screens Loading Firmware When updating the firmware of the Receiver via the software s Firmware Update Center the Receiver screen will display the update progress When complete the main Receiver status screen will be displayed Loading firmware Progress 55 4 15 Operating the DNR9OO in Repeater Mode This section explains how to operate the Repeater and provides an overview of the menu options on the units LCD screen Refer to section 4 14 3 to learn how to switch the DNR900 from Receiver to Repeater mode 4 15 1 Turning on the Unit In order to view the Repeater menu options the unit must be turned on by pressing the Scroll button on the keypad Ensure the unit is connected to the AC adapter Once the unit is switched on it will emit a short beep and the screen will display a welcome message Fourtec DataNet Ready 4 15 2 Display Shutdown Whe
180. ket Negative Center Four sensor Excitation inputs Figure 21 DNL920 data logger external connections Mini USB Port To enable data download direct to PC via USB port 43 Ww 12 V Power Socket To connect logger to external power supply negative center Sensor Inputs Pluggable screw terminal blocks marked In 1 to In 4 from left to right to connect wide range of sensor types for data acquisition All four inputs can be used simultaneously Sensors can be connected in any order To connect a sensor to the DataNet data logger unplug the screw terminal connect the sensor s wires to the terminals and then plug the terminal back to the corresponding socket on the input block Excitation socket Output power socket used to power external sensors power derived directly from the 12V 2A external power supply adaptor 4 2 2 DNL804 and DNL804 BXT External lt antenna 4 External Current ____ s gt Bw 4 to 20 mA input Figure 22 DNL804 and DNL804 BXT data logger external connections External antenna For extended transmission distance of the logger External 4 to 20 mA input Standard input for connecting to sensor with 4 to 20 mA output 44 FOURTEC 4 2 3 DNL808 and DNL808 BXT External lt _ antenna f gt External NTC 10 X N Cay aa KQ input N f External NTC _ i lt _ s KQ probe Figure 23 DNL808 and DNL808 BXT data logger external connections External a
181. lace the batteries ensuring the correct polarity of the battery 5 Push the battery pack back into place 6 Secure the panel with one screw 4 9 6 Power Adapter The DataNet power adapter is used to power the DNR800 DNR900 DNL910 DNL920 and PA model units The mains adaptor AC DC adaptor converts mains power from a wall outlet to a voltage suitable to the DataNet hardware unit e Output Capacitor filtered 9 to 12 VDC 300 mA e Female plug center negative O O Note Only use Fourtec supplied power adapters to avoid damaging the units with incorrect power supply 4 9 7 Data Logger Battery Life Battery life depends on the logger sampling rate transmission rate type of sensor network architecture and number of measured sensors e DNL910 and DNL920 can last up to six months on a charged battery e DNL8XX can last up to 10 months on a new battery e DNL8XX BXT can last up to 3 years with all four batteries connected The table below provides some example scenarios of standard logger configurations and expected battery life f FOURTEC Logger Sensor Setup Sample Transmission Battery Model Rate Rate Life DNL910 e Internal Temperature 15 minutes 15 minutes Five e 4x Thermocouple months DNL910 1x PT 100 15 minutes 15 minutes Six months DNL808 1xNTC 10 KQO 15 minutes 15 minutes 10 months DNL810 e Internal Temperature 15 minutes 15 minutes 10 months e Internal Humidity Table 2 Data logger battery life sce
182. laceable and can run up to two years depending on the logger configuration and model MicroLite Data Loggers Part Number Part Number MicroLite Il LITE5032P RH MicroLite Il LITE5008P LITE5032P Two internal digital and humidity One internal NTC temperature sensor and temperature sensors and USB interface USB interface Memory Capacity 32 000 samples Memory Capacity Four models Power supply Battery operated MicroLite Il 8 000 and 32 000 samples Power supply Battery operated 100 Part Number Part Number MicroLite Il LITE5032P 4 20 MicroLite Il LITE5032P V One 4 20 mA current input and USB interface One 0 10 V voltage input and USB interface Logger cap contains universal connector for Logger cap contains universal connector for current sensor When cap is removed USB voltage sensor When cap is removed USB interface is available interface is available Memory Capacity 32 000 samples Memory Capacity 32 000 samples Power supply Battery operated Power supply Battery operated Part Number MicroLite Il LITE5032P EXT One NTC 50 to 150 C temperature input and USB interface Logger cap contains universal connector for temperature sensor When cap is removed USB interface is available Sensor is included Memory Capacity 32 000 samples Power supply Battery operated 8 2 2 Hardware Accessories A magnet key is provided to stop and activate the logger as well as to mark time stamps In addition a
183. late to all aspects of the program are located in the main upper toolbar Tools specific to the graphs are located on the graph lower toolbar Refer to section 17 5 5 for a description of these toolbars 159 f FOURTEC As the DataSuite platform supports several Fourtec products the interface is common for most of their functionality There are several areas such as logger configuration where the interface differs These differences will be detailed throughout the chapter 17 5 1 Map View When DataSuite is first launched and the device detection window closes the default window that is opened is the Map View see screenshot below This view is used to monitor the status and data of all devices currently detected by the software This may be via USB connection e g for the MicroLogPRO Il or via wireless connection as with the DataNet system In the case of the DataNet the location and network connection of all of the data loggers and Repeaters in the network in addition to the Receiver is monitored from the Map View You can also switch to Map View at any time by clicking the Map View button in the main toolbar In addition the Map View can be printed Icons are used to represent each of the Fourtec devices and using the mouse the user can select specific actions to be performed on the unit Name tags can also be displayed for each DataNet icon on the Map View Figure 74 Main window Map View desktop Refer
184. le clicking the logger icon 108 Chapter 10 MicroLite Hardware Overview This chapter details the hardware features of the MicroLite data loggers 10 1 Data Logger Layout Front LCD View Temp RH model Logger cap g USB interface LCD screen Rear View Temp RH model Battery holder Temp RH sensor Magnet location holder External Cap View External input cap External input cap with universal connector 109 5 em FO EC Polarity of Two wire Connector for mA V and NTC inputs fi O e LCD screen Displays logger status logger data alarm level battery level and engineering units LED Blue LED indicates activation logging and alarm status Magnet Holder Insert the magnet key here when performing stop run time stamp functionality Battery Holder Location of replaceable battery compartment External Input Cap Special cap interfacing the external sensor to the logger s USB connector 10 2 MicroLite Sensor Overview This section provides an overview of the sensor specifications of the MicroLite data loggers 10 2 1 Internal Sensor Types Measurement Accuracy Logger Model Range Digital Humidity 5 to 95 2 LI T E5032P RH ngia 40 C to80 C 0 3 C LITE5032P RH Temperature LITESOO8P Temperature 40 C to 80 C 0 3 C NTC LITE5032P 110 T FOURTEC 10 2 2 External Sensor Types Measurement Accuracy Logger Model Rang
185. libration Refer to section 17 20 17 19 40n page 224 for an overview of the Calibration feature Note A logger can t be calibrated while it is in Run mode The option will be grayed out You must Stop the logger first Cancel Firmware Update When a firmware update is in progress select this option to cancel the update and continue using the previous firmware version Setup Refer to section 17 17 on page 196 for an overview of how to setup the logger Stop Sends a command to the logger to stop logging data Run Sends a command to the logger to start logging data This command will also clear the existing logger memory 197 FOURTEC Remove This option removes from the Map View icons of loggers that are no longer in use Turn Off This option will turn the unit off and is password enabled As a precaution to avoid any data loss all data not yet transmitted will first be downloaded to the computer prior to turning the unit off 17 16 15 MicroLite Logger Icon Connection Options When connected to the computer via USB the MicroLite models support the following features Display Data Displays the logger s data in Graph view The graph displays the data in real time There is also the option to display the data in Table view or to view the data statistics Note MicroLite II models with external input caps 4 20 mA 0 10 V and NTC Temperature do not support online real time data view Download Data Downl
186. links orange at for 0 5 second intervals e Low LED blinks orange at one second intervals e Unit is out of range LED emits steady orange light Note Power consumption of logger battery during signal test increases significantly so do not overuse this feature 4 13 6 Call Unit from Software To locate the unit via the software right click the unit icon on the Map View and select the Call Device LED option The unit LED will alternate between slow green and red blinks and after several blinks it will stop 4 14 Operating the DNR9OO in Receiver Mode This section explains how to operate the Receiver using the menu options on the units LCD screen as how to change the DNR900 unit type from Receiver to Repeater 4 14 1 Turning on the Unit In order to view the Receiver menu options the unit must be turned on by pressing the Scroll button on the keypad Ensure the unit is charged or connected to the AC adapter Once the unit is turned on it will display a series of status messages finishing with the welcome screen below Receiver ID 021 180 012 4 14 2 Receiver Menus When the unit is selected to work as a Receiver as opposed to working as a Repeater the following menus are displayed on the unit Network Name and ID When the unit is switched on the following screen is displayed indicating the default network name and the unique network ID formed by this Receiver The network name can be changed via the DataSui
187. llowing information e The sensor reading currently recorded e Sensor reading of up to three decimal places if the reading integer is less than 10 e g 2 543 V e f logger is in Stop Timer Run or Push to Run modes e Low or High alarm indication e Min Max readings e Full logger memory status e Marking of a time stamp e External Cap is not connected external input models only e Battery level 10 6 1 LCD Status Messages e USB Indicates that the logger is connected to the PC via USB e Stop The logger is currently in Stop mode not sampling data e Run Visible immediately before the logger is about to start sampling data once the Run command was sent e Push Indicates the logger is in Push to Run mode as configured in the logger Setup window e tRUN Indicates the logger is in Timer Run mode as configured in the logger Setup window e F Indicates the MicroLite Firmware version e g 00 83 e T01 T02 etc Indicates that a time stamp has been taken e FULL Indicates that the logger memory has reached full capacity and the logger has stopped e NC Indicates that no cap is currently connected to the logger and is relevant for the external input models only Current Voltage and Temperature The logger will only start running when the cap is connected to avoid sampling of data before the external sensor is connected 10 6 2 LCD Mode of Operation For the MicroLite II only in the Power Savi
188. logger Perform the following test on each logger in your system while deciding where to position the logger 1 Using the Scroll button scroll through the main menu on the logger until you reach the following display Signal level Run test gt Menu 2 Press the Menu button to run the test The signal level and link quality will be displayed As you move the logger further away from the Receiver you will see these two parameters drop from a maximum of 100 When the logger is out of range of the Receiver you will see the following screen Out of range 3 To exit the Signal test press the Scroll button 3 8 2 Overcoming RF Obstacles A universal issue concerning any wireless system is how to overcome a hostile RF environment DataNet s ZigBee RF protocol has been designed for these hostile RF environments that routinely exist onsite ZigBee can overcome competing wireless noise and other problems communicating the data lts mesh networking capabilities allows it to re route signal traffic around temporary or permanent physical obstacles radio frequency interference Repeater error or other such failures The robustness of the system is such that there is no single point of failure ensuring data recovery from end units on the network Tips on overcoming RF barriers e When first creating the network in the environment where the loggers will be deployed form a new network on the Receiver There may be local interfer
189. lt in the alarm being activated when logger is not in alarm and therefore deactivated when there is an alarm the circuit will be opened Connect In 1 to your external alarm device Use the Alarm Setup tab in the Setup dialog to define the logger alarm settings If these settings are breached then the alarm will be activated 50 FOURTEC Receiver External Alarm By connecting the external alarm to the Ext Alarm input on the Receiver any alarm on the entire network will activate the external alarm Use the Alarm Setup tab in the Setup dialog to define the logger alarm settings Whenever the Receiver receives an alarm status from any logger on the network the external alarm will be activated No additional configuration in the software is required External Alarm Schematic See the schematic below explaining how to hook up an external alarm to the DataNet unit 3 4 V battery to power relay Alarm device e g siren Figure 29 External alarm schematic e from DNR900 goes to of the Relay inputs e of Relay input goes to battery that powers the Relay e Load inputs of the Relay go to the Alarm device e g siren lights etc e ofthe battery goes to of DNR9OO Note Maximum load of the Relay is 50 mA 3 V Refer to Appendix A DataNet Specifications for the full external alarm output specification 4 7 7 Polarity Current voltage thermocouples and user defined sensors have distinct polarity
190. lue Real Value Value 1 Value 2 Figure 79 Define New Sensor dialog 2 Click New to enable the fields 3 Select the Base sensor from the drop down menu depending on whether your sensor s output is 0 to 1 V O to 50 mV 4 to 20mA or measuring pulses 4 If you wish to configure a defined sensor for the EC8XX or MicroLite II models make sure to select the base sensor corresponding to the specific logger model 5 Enter the sensor name and sensor unit 171 FOURTEC 6 Enter two calibration values two real values and the corresponding output values of the sensor 7 Click Save 8 To make any changes to the existing sensor definitions stand on the sensor name and click Edit Otherwise click New to define additional sensors or click Close to exit the dialog To use the custom defined sensor 1 Enter the Setup dialog for the data logger you want to configure 2 Select the Input you wish to use and from the Sensor Type drop down menu select the custom sensor which now appears in this list 3 Proceed with the setup as you would normally do 17 8 2 Switch Sensor View Mode While in Sensor View selecting this option will switch the sensor view between large and small window sizes By reducing the size of the sensor window you display only the sensor type and sensor data Enlarging the size of the sensor window will display sensor type sensor data and logger name 17 8 3 Lock Map View While in
191. m collating a wealth of relevant system data The software also enables you to configure calibrate or update the firmware of DataNet units wirelessly Key DataNet benefits include e Reliable transmission ensuring no data loss e Long range monitoring e Ability to constantly expand transmission range by adding additional Repeaters or turning loggers into Repeaters 17 T FOURTEC e Portable units facilitating easy deployment in various environments e Remote programming and firmware updates e 65 000 possible end units per network e Low power consumption e Long battery life e Minimal costs thanks to wireless infrastructure e Feature rich software including multi network support per PC 2 2 What is ZigBee ZigBee is a standards based protocol built around the IEEE 802 15 4 wireless protocol providing the network infrastructure required for wireless low power network applications The mesh network eliminates single points of failure by providing multiple pathways for data to travel IEEE is the nstitute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers a non profit organization dedicated to furthering technology involving electronics and electronic devices 2 3 The ZigBee Concept The Coordinator This device creates and maintains the network Once the network is up and running the coordinator behaves as just another device on the network There is only one Coordinator in a ZigBee network The Router A router relays data pa
192. m one internal non replaceable CR2032 3V lithium battery The data logger can run for up to 6 months depending on the operating conditions Sampling rate has no impact on the battery life 146 FOURTEC Shelf life of the PicoLite battery prior to first time use is at least 5 years The battery maintains the logger s Real Time Clock RTC The logger s time date settings are synchronized with the PC when you perform a Setup Note When connected to the PC via USB the logger will draw its power via the USB port and not via the internal battery 16 5 USB Connection The PicoLite interfaces with the computer via any of its USB Host ports No USB driver installation is required in order to be detected by the computer and by the DataSuite software The software will automatically detect the device upon connection to the PC When connected to the computer USB port the logger motherboard will heat up due to the voltage emitted from the USB port The PicoLite temperature will likely be affected and there will be a rise in the temperature reading by several degrees Celsius Once disconnected the readings return to ambient immediately 16 6 Operating the PicoLite This section explains how to operate the PicoLite loggers and provides an overview of the logger functionality 16 6 1 PicoLite Working Modes PicoLite is always set in one of five possible working modes These modes are all activated via the DataSuite software or using the
193. me unit more than once it will receive the setup but will not be counted again in the total number of units 8 When you connect the first unit the following window will pop up Auto Setup Auto Setup Click OK to perform setup on the detected logger Note All logger data will be deleted after setup 4 Run after setup F Don t prompt me again during this session If you wish to automatically run each unit following setup ensure Run after setup is selected Otherwise unselect the checkbox and the logger will remain in Stop mode 9 Select the Don t prompt me again during this session checkbox so you don t have to click OK to approve the setup when each unit is connected therefore making the whole process move very quickly Click OK 10 When you have finished with the Auto Setup mode go to Devices gt Auto Setup Mode gt Disable Auto Setup The info box will disappear and upon PicoLite detection it won t undergo automatic setup 17 18 Entering Alarm Reason in CFR Mode In the DataSuite CFR software and as part of the CFR requirements any recorded sensor alarm must be assigned an explanation why the alarm occurred Whenever an alarm is recorded the Alarm Reason icon wil flash in the upper DataSuite toolbar It will continue to flash until all alarms are assigned a Reason When exiting the application a system message will pop up warning that there are alarms without an explanation To add an alarm reason 219
194. mment via the DataSuite software Every time data is transferred to the computer it is labeled both with the logger s serial number and comment and is displayed in the graph or data table view The unit serial number is also marked on a sticker on the back of the product 13 5 Power Supply The MicroLogPRO II data loggers run from one internal replaceable 2 3 AA 3 6 V lithium battery Depending on the logger configuration and operating conditions from a new battery the data logger can run for up to 2 years Note When connected to the PC via USB the logger will draw its power via the USB port and not via the internal battery 13 5 1 Battery Level Indication The MicroLogPRO II battery level indication is viewed as follows e On the logger LCD e Inthe DataSuite logger Setup dialog and logger icon tooltip in Map View EC800 EC850 Rev B firmware v2 00 or higher only Battery Level on Logger LCD e 4 segment battery icon is displayed on the logger LCD it is always displayed The definition of each segment is 3 segments 100 2 segments 50 gt 99 segment 25 gt 49 0 segments 0 gt 24 Measurement of Battery Voltage The battery voltage is measured as follows e Each time the device is removed from the USB and is updated in the software upon reconnection to PC e When the logger is in Run mode and not connected to the USB it is measured every hour and recorded to the logger memory When reco
195. mperature Scale Celsius gt Fahrenheit Options IF Cyclic Run Timer Run Push to run Sampling Rate Interval 00 0 a Recording time 11 02 40 00 Setup amp Run Setup Figure 65 PicoLite Logger Setup window This dialog provides non editable information such as the serial number battery level model number and firmware version of the current unit On the Properties and Sensors tabs the user is able to configure the following parameters Unit s comment Sampling rate Activation and memory modes Averaging points Temperature scale C F Alarm levels Alarm delay In the Properties tab 142 FOURTEC a Select the memory mode Cyclic or non Cyclic b Select the activation mode Push to Run Timer Run or leave the checkboxes unmarked for immediate activation c Select the sampling rate anywhere from 1 every minute to 1 every 18 hours Refer to the Recording Time to ensure the logger won t stop or begin cyclic recording before the end of your specific measurement session 4 Inthe Sensors tab a If you require alarm levels select the alarm checkbox and enter the specific threshold values 5 Inthe Boomerang Report tab a Enable the Boomerang feature via this tab Enter contacts to receive the data report via email when logger is connected to another computer with DataSuite installed Refer to section 17 25 for more details 6 From any of the tabs click Setup and Run to begin lo
196. must verify the logger readings are now accurate by repeating Step 1a e If accuracy according to the specifications is still not achieved following the second round of verification then you may further adjust the readings using the Offset calibration method as described in section 17 20 5 Note When calibrating inputs which are connected to external sensors e g PT 100 or NIC temperature sensors remember that the calibration is specific to both the input and connected sensor at the time of calibration If you replace this sensor with another one you might experience temperature deviations even though you calibrated the input Please contact Fourtec s help desk or your local distributor with any questions regarding the calibration procedure 225 17 20 2 Logger Calibration Methods Sensor DataNet and DagLink Sensor Inputs Type Calibration Method Current 4 20mA _Two point calibration and offset Temperature Internal Temperature PT 100 2 wire Digital Offset calibration _Two point calibration and offset Temperature Thermocouple K Offset calibration Voltage
197. n 1 as Alarm Normally Open or Alarm Normally Closed in the logger Setup window in the DataSuite software 89 T FOURTEC Normally Open will result in the alarm being activated during alarm status the circuit will be closed Normally Closed will result in the alarm being activated when logger is not in alarm and therefore deactivated when there is an alarm the circuit will be opened Connect In 1 to your external alarm device and connect the logger to AC power Use the Alarm Setup tab in the Setup dialog to define the logger alarm settings If these settings are breached then the alarm will be activated External Alarm Schematic See the schematic below explaining how to hook up an external alarm to the DaqLink unit 3 4 V battery to power relay Alarm device e g siren Figure 42 External alarm schematic e from DagLink unit goes to of the Relay inputs e of Relay input goes to battery that powers the Relay e Load inputs of the Relay go to the Alarm device e g siren lights etc e ofthe battery goes to of the DagLink unit Note Maximum load of the Relay is 50 mA 3 V Refer to Appendix B DaqLink Specifications for the full external alarm output specification 7 3 7 Polarity Current voltage thermocouples and user defined sensors have distinct polarity Be careful to connect them in the right polarity 7 3 8 Frequency Pulse Counter Connect the signal wires to In 4 terminal blo
198. n move the logger or Repeater icons accordingly so you can have a visual representation of their location in the facility 5 Take each logger and begin to distribute in your facility in the precise location you would like them to be based Once in position you can then run the Signal Test on each logger to verify that you have a good signal to the Receiver If you are out of range and there is no alternative location for the logger you will most likely have to add at least one Repeater to the network or replace the existing logger with a PA logger for longer transmission range 6 Once each of the loggers is in position return to the PC and in Map View verify that each of the loggers is online You can also use the Show Network Paths feature to see the path of the logger to the Receiver and the strength of the transmission 7 If you determine that you need to add Repeater s to the network in order to bring end units online or enhance the transmission where the signal is weak then deploy the Repeater s with the following points in mind a There must be an electrical socket accessible at the location of the Repeater as they must be powered externally in order to run for more than a few hours b Place the Repeater s as high from the ground as possible in order to enhance the wireless signal from its antenna 39 8 FOURTEC c Expose the Repeater s to as many end units as possible For example if there is a room with several offli
199. n number Firmware version of the logger e Last sample time If logger is running time stamp of last recorded sample e Real time Sensor values All sensor values are displayed including sensor name and alarm status 17 16 19 PicoLite Logger Icon Connection Options When connected to the computer via USB the PicoLite supports the following features Display Data Displays the logger s data in Graph view The graph displays the data in real time There is also the option to display the data in Table view or to view the data statistics 201 FOURTEC Download Data Downloads all data in the logger memory to the DataSuite software When logger is downloading the data the Logger icon in Map View will appear as follows ad Cancel Download When logger is downloading data you may cancel the download per logger by selecting this menu item As cancelling the data download results in data not being downloaded to the computer there is a chance that data may be lost if the download isn t completed at a later stage and the logger s cyclic memory has meanwhile erased these readings Calibration Refer to section 17 19 4 on page 224 for an overview of the Calibration feature Note A logger can t be calibrated while it is in Run mode The option will be grayed out You must Stop the logger first Update Firmware Selecting this feature will commence update of the logger firmware as long as the firmware file is situated in
200. n the Repeater is running from batteries only if the screen is inactive for thirty seconds it will turn off However the Repeater will continue to operate in the background Press the Scroll button to enable the LCD screen again The screen will not turn off during firmware upgrade When connected to external power supply the Repeater screen will always stay on 4 15 3 Joining a Network When a Repeater is powered on or reset it will automatically scan for a network after the welcome message has appeared There are four scenarios that can occur while scanning for a network Scenario 1 The unit can t find the last network that it was connected to For example the Repeater is a new unit which was never previously joined a network Scenario 2 The unit scans and finds the last network it was connected to and joins that network Scenario 3 The unit can t find any networks at all 69 FOURTEC Scenario 4 The unit found a network but failed to join Read below for more details on each scenario Scenario 1 If the unit can t find the last network that it was connected to for example it s a new unit the unit will display all the networks that are in range Scan for network Scan for network Found network Where is the number of networks found Once the scan has been completed the following screen appears Scan complete lf more than one network was found the user will need to select the network ID that he wa
201. n the keypad Ensure the logger is charged or connected to 57 FOURTEC 4 12 2 Display Shutdown When the data logger is running from batteries only if the screen is inactive for thirty seconds it will turn off However the logger will continue to operate in the background Press the Scroll button to enable the LCD screen again The screen will not turn off during firmware upgrade When connected to external power supply the logger screen will always stay on 4 12 3 Joining a Network When a logger is powered on or reset it will automatically scan for a network after the welcome message has appeared There are four scenarios that can occur while scanning for a network Scenario 1 The unit can t find the last network that it was connected to For example the logger is a new unit which was never previously joined a network Scenario 2 The unit scans and finds the last network it was connected to and joins that network Scenario 3 The unit can t find any networks at all Scenario 4 The unit found a network but failed to join Read below for more details on each scenario Scenario 1 If the unit can t find the last network that it was connected to for example it s a new unit the unit will display all the networks that are in range Scan for network Scan for network Found network Where is the number of networks found Once the scan has been completed the following screen appears Scan complete lf
202. n to this procedure is that even if the last connected network is found during the scan the unit will not automatically connect to it Leave network Note If the logger was in Run mode prior to sending the Leave Network command the software will download all data from the unit first and then force it to leave the network Reset Unit When the unit is reset upon start up it will automatically scan for networks The unit will automatically connect to the previously connected network assuming it was found in the network scan Following reset the unit will continue to operate according to its last set up instruction For example if the logger was in Run mode then after reset it will continue to run and record data Turn Off Unit selecting this option will shut the unit down You can turn the unit on again by pressing the Scroll button It is recommended to turn off the unit when it is not in use Turn off unit Note Turning off the logger when in Short Range Repeater mode can have adverse affects on your network as other units may be dependent on the Repeater for transmitting its data to the Receiver To prevent the SRR from being a point of failure if shut off ensure the network is robust enough by having alternative routes for the end units to reach the Receiver 4 12 5 Additional Logger Screens Unit Beep When the DataSuite software activates the Call Unit feature the logger will beep and the following screen w
203. n to red just as the Logger icon would e Double clicking the individual sensor window will open the data in the online Graph view e Scrolling over the sensor window with the mouse cursor will display the logger tool tip with relevant logger data similar to Map View Refer to section 17 5 2 for more details on using the Sensor View Note By going to Tools gt Switch Sensor View Mode you can reduce the size of the sensor window to display only the sensor type and sensor data Recommended for networks containing many loggers 3 8 Optimizing the Network This section outlines a number of features and suggestions for optimizing the DataNet network and getting the best performance out of the end units and parent units For example when you first setup your network you want to ensure that the loggers are placed in the optimum position in order to receive and transmit data to from the DataSuite software 35 FOURTEC Refer to the DataNet specifications to guide you on the range of the DataNet units With this Knowledge and based on the layout of your facility you should have a good idea of the likely positional layout of your units 3 8 1 Signal Test Utility Rather than setup the system on atrial and error basis DataNet has a Signal Test utility built in to the logger firmware which gives you a clear idea of the strength of the signal of each logger to the Receiver and the quality of the data link between Receiver and
204. n tweak this approach based on experience you gain while using the system Note When deploying the system bear in mind that several factors could cause interference with the system such as electromagnetic pulses metal shielding in the vicinity of the transmissions other devices using the same 2 4 GHz band etc Be familiar with your environment before deploying the system Also refer to section 3 8 1 After you have charged the DataNet units and are ready to deploy them in your facility collect all units data logger end units Receiver and Repeaters if relevant and bring them to your PC workstation 2 Connect the Receiver to the PC and form a network Turn on the units and one by one bring them online so you can view their icons in the DataSuite software s Map View 3 Configure each of the units via the Setup feature At this stage it is not necessary to configure the type of sensors you will be using or sample rate alarm levels etc The point of this step is to configure each of the units with a logger or Repeater name that indicates where in your facility they will be deployed For example Room 15 Freezer or Floor 2 Bio Lab This will make it much easier for you to recognize the units in the Map View once you have deployed them Once in place you can reconfigure the units however you like 4 It is also recommended if possible to change the Map View default background to a diagram or map of your facility You can the
205. n will send the setup to the logger and immediately start logging data Setup Only Clicking Setup Only will send the setup to the logger but it will not actually start logging data You will need to select Run from the Logger context menu or go back into the Setup dialog Close Clicking Close will close the Setup dialog without saving any of your configurations Note Running the logger clears the logger memory All previously recorded data will be erased when you begin a new logging session 216 T FOURTEC Sensors Tab As the PicoLite only has one input this tab is used to configure the temperature sensor alarm levels A major feature of the DataSuite system is the ability to configure alarm levels into the loggers so any breach of these levels is recorded on the data logger and monitored by the software if the unit is connected via USB The user may be notified of these alarms via Email SMS audible and visual indicators Setup tor Picolite 1254156 lt Properties Sensors Boomerang Report Alarm Corfiourtbo Setup amp Aun Stun Close Alarm Delay The time until the alarm is activated You may not want to have the alarm sound immediately after the alarm level is breached as you are only interested in a condition where the alarm level lasted a certain amount of time For example if monitoring change of temperature in a freezer you would only be interested in a High alarm which lasted more than o
206. nal Test Utility 3 8 2 Overcoming RF Obstacles 3 8 3 Showing the Network Path 3 8 4 Adding Repeaters to the Network 3 8 5 Using Loggers as Repeaters 3 9 Recommended Approach to Deploying DataNet Units 3 9 1 DataNet Site Survey CHAPTER 4 DATANET HARDWARE OVERVIEW 15 17 17 24 24 25 26 4 1 Data Logger Front Panel Layout 4 1 1 DNL910 and DNL920 4 1 2 DNL804 DNL808 and DNL810 4 1 3 DNL804 DNL808 and DNL810 BXT External Battery Pack 4 2 Data Logger External Connections 4 2 1 DNL910 and DNL920 4 2 2 _DNL804 and DNL804 BXT 4 2 3 DNL808 and DNL808 BXT 4 2 4 DNL810 4 3 _DNR800 Mini Repeater Front Panel Layout 4 4 DNR900 Receiver Repeater Front Panel Layout 4 5 DNR800 Mini Repeater External Connections 4 6 DNR900 Receiver Repeater External Connections 4 7 Data Logger Sensor Overview 4 7 1 Internal Sensor Types 4 7 2 External Sensor Types 4 7 3 Sensor Connection 4 7 4 External PT 100 and NTC Sensor Connection 4 7 5 Programming Limitations for DNL910 and DNL920 4 7 6 External Alarm Output 4 7 7 Polarity 4 7 8 Frequency Pulse Counter 4 7 9 User Defined Sensors 4 7 10 Sensor Alarms 4 7 11 Sensor Calibration 4 8 Unit Serial Number and Comment 4 9 Power Supply 4 9 1 DNR900 in Receiver Mode 4 9 2 DNR800 and DNR900 in Repeater Mode 4 9 3 _ DNL910 and DNL920 Data Loggers 4 9 4 Mini DataNet DNL8XX BXT Data Loggers 4 9 5 Mini DataNet DNL8XX Data Loggers
207. narios 4 10 USB Communication Cable A mini USB communication cable is supplied as part of the DataSuite software kit This cable has the following roles e To connect the Receiver to the DataSuite PC workstation allowing the Receiver to communicate with the DataSuite software and manage the DataNet network e To power the Receiver when connected to the PC the internal battery is not charged e To enable data download directly via USB for DNL910 DNL920 and PA model loggers e To enable firmware update directly via USB for DNL910 DNL920 and PA model loggers as well as DNR9OO e To enable shutdown directly via USB of DNL910 DNL920 and PA model loggers Note The USB driver is installed as part of the software installation process Without this driver the PC won t detect the Receiver To avoid compatibility problems do not connect the Receiver to the PC before installing the USB driver A Type B plug m 7 CA D Connect to PC USB port i S SS AA Type A plug Connect to device USB port Figure 30 USB communication cable 4 11 DataNet Keypad Overview Note Explanations for DNL units also apply to the PA models 4 11 1 DNL910 DNL920 and DNR900 Keypad The DNL910 DNL920 and DNR900 units each have two buttons on the keypad used to navigate through the LCD menu options as well as turn on the units Refer to section 4 12 to learn how to operate the data loggers and sections 4 13 and 4 15 to learn h
208. ne end units requiring a Repeater position the Repeater next to the room so that it is in range of as many of these end units as possible so you don t have to add more Repeaters After you have deployed the Repeater s return to the software and using the Show Network Paths feature verify that all end units are now successfully transmitting to the Receiver either on their own or via a parent Repeater You can continue to tweak the position of the units until you are satisfied with the quality of the transmission Now that the units are in place the last step of initial deployment is to reconfigure each unit to start data acquisition Configure the sensor setup sample rate transmission rate alarm levels Email SMS notifications etc as you see fit 3 9 1 DataNet Site Survey Fourtec has constructed a Site Survey document to aid all DataNet integrators prior during and after every DataNet system installation Please contact the Fourtec Help Desk for this document which includes detailed instructions on surveying various aspects of the DataNet site prior to deployment to ensuring there are no RF problems for example Check lists often prove indispensible when certifying the installation two such lists are provided below Installation Overview Check List Se oe a 10 11 12 13 14 Install DataSuite software Launch in Trial version Check for software firmware updates Register software Serial Number online offlin
209. ne minute as anything else could just be caused by the freezer door opening for a few seconds as opposed to a power failure leading to rise in temperature Sensor Configuration To set the temperature sensor alarm levels first enable the Alarm checkbox Then enter the relevant minimum and maximum alarm levels depending on your specific application thresholds Sensor Configuration PicoLite Temperature C Iv Alarm 4000 10 C 217 T FOURTEC 17 17 6 Using the Auto Setup Mode Note Auto Setup Mode support MicroLite Il MicroLogPRO II and PicoLite only The quickest way to configure a large number of loggers is by using the Auto Setup feature Rather than manually entering the Setup dialog and defining the setup parameters for each logger when connected to the computer with Auto Setup mode enabled each unit will be configured and run automatically There is no need for manual intervention other than to connect the logger You connect each logger watch the setup being performed instantaneously and then connect the next logger and so on until all are completed and without the need to open more windows or confirm any commands To perform Auto Setup follow the steps as outlined below 1 First you must connect a unit which will be the reference unit Once detected by DataSuite right click on the logger icon and select Setup Configure the setup window according to the setup which should appear on all units you are
210. network name appears in the tooltip of every device connected to that network Click Setup to implement the change or Close to close the dialog without making any changes Update Firmware selecting this option will launch the Receiver firmware update process Refer to section 18 2 for more details Lock Network By locking the network you do not allow any additional units to join the network During the network scan the logger will not even detect the network if it is locked By unlocking the network you leave it open for any unit to join the network even if you do not wish them to Form New Network Select this option to form a new network on the Receiver The Receiver will then form a new network based on your RF environment This will ensure optimal network performance Refer to section 3 8 for more details on optimizing the performance Once a new network is formed any loggers connected to the old network will need to rescan and join the new network This must be done manually by going to each logger and resetting it via the LCD menu options Refresh Network Connections Use this feature to send a command to the Receiver to re establish connection to the end units in its specific network This is useful when wanting to ensure the network connectivity is performing optimally without any delay or lag due to changes in environmental conditions or location of the end units Such delays can explain logger icons not displaying the co
211. ng Settings tab in the logger Setup window the user has the option to define several modes of operation for the LCD screen when sampling e Always On The LCD will never turn off e LCD is off and will turn on for 30 60 or 120 seconds upon alarm state or magnet key operation In addition when the logger is not sampling in Stop mode the LCD will shut down after two minutes of inactivity in order to conserve battery life 114 f FOURTEC 10 7 LED Overview The MicroLite features a LED to give real time indication of activation and alarms e Sample with alarm When in Run mode the LED will flash blue at five second intervals once an alarm is recorded until the logger memory is cleared There is no LED indication when there is no alarm Note To configure the LED alarm indication functionality in MicroLite II devices enter the Power Saving Settings tab in the logger Setup window and select unselect the Disable LED alarm indications checkbox accordingly Disabling this feature will also prolong battery life LED Configuration J Disable LED alarm indications while device is running e Sample without alarm The LED will not flash with each recorded sample e Connected to USB The LED will permanently indicate blue as long as the unit is connected to the computer via USB and in Stop mode e Marking atime stamp The LED will flash blue when a time stamp is marked as it is recording a new sample to the logge
212. ng of up to 10 points around the real value in order to smooth the data readings if they are exhibiting interference The recommended averaging is 4 samples Temperature Units Toggle between C and F This applies to the readings displayed on the logger LCD as well as in the software Active Sensors Depending on the logger model you can activate up to two internal sensors and four external sensors Simply select the inputs you want to use and then select the sensor types from the adjacent drop down menu You don t have to select the external sensor input in any order You may select only Input 4 if you desire Note On the DNL920 you cannot run the humidity sensor without running the temperature sensor in parallel This is because when using the DNL920 data logger and selecting the internal humidity sensor in the Device Setup dialog the internal digital temperature sensor will automatically be selected as well This sensor provides the temperature compensation necessary for the humidity sensor to reach the 3 accuracy as stated in the sensor specifications It is not used for recording temperature The internal digital sensor is used to record temperature on the DNL920 Custom Sensor Names You can also give the sensor a custom name which will appear in the software when viewing the data This is convenient when using several of the same type of sensors and you wish to differentiate between them in terms of their environment
213. ng the Logger 9 6 Viewing Data 9 6 1 Online Data Views 9 6 2 Logger Tooltip 9 6 3 Sensor View 9 7 Downloading Data CHAPTER 10 MICROLITE HARDWARE OVERVIEW 98 99 101 102 102 102 103 103 104 106 107 107 108 109 10 1 Data Logger Layout 10 2 MicroLite Sensor Overview 10 2 1 Internal Sensor Types 10 2 2 External Sensor Types 10 2 3 User Defined Sensors 10 2 1 Sensor Calibration 10 3 Unit Serial Number and Comment 10 4 Power Supply 10 4 1 Battery Level Indication 10 4 2 Battery Life 10 4 3 Replacing the Battery 10 5 USB Connection 10 6 LCD Screen Overview 10 6 1 LCD Status Messages 10 6 2 LCD Mode of Operation 10 7 LED Overview 10 8 Logger Cap for External Input Models 10 8 1 External Sensor Cap Detection Mechanism 10 9 Using the MicroLite Magnet 10 10 Operating the MicroLite 10 10 1 MicroLite Operating Modes 10 10 2 Turning on the Unit 10 10 38 Viewing Real time Data on LCD 10 10 4 Viewing Min Max Readings on LCD 10 10 5 Viewing Firmware Version 10 10 6 Sensor Alarm Levels 10 10 7 Alarm Duration 10 10 8 Marking Time Stamps CHAPTER 11 MICROLOGPRO II OVERVIEW 11 1 MicroLogPRO Il Introduction 11 2 MicroLogPRO II Packaging 11 2 1 The Data Logger 11 2 2 Hardware Accessories CHAPTER 12 MICROLOGPRO II IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE 12 1 Pre setup Requirements 12 2 Launching the Software 12 3 Connecting the Logger 12 4 Loading Map View Background
214. nient time saving feature when needing to setup tens or even hundreds of units for mass deployment using the same setup parameters Sampling rate memory mode etc 181 FOURTEC By taking a default setup saved for a reference unit when in Auto Setup mode each unit connected to the PC with being configured using this setup file Refer to section 17 17 6 for full instructions for using the Auto Setup feature 17 11 Search Devices lf you have many device icons situated in the Map View and have trouble locating the specific device to configure the Search feature can be very helpful In the top right corner of the main window you will find the Search window aag Search Sl The search criteria are e Device Serial Number e g 7002354 e Device Comment e g Lab 1 F e Device Type e g DNL910 PA Enter the relevant search criteria in the text window and all relevant matching devices will appear in the Search Results box o a x 700 Q gt Search Resuks 2 matches found Si EC850 7006209 Seral Number 7006209 i EC800 7005737 ome Serial Number 7005737 The Search Results box will filter the results as the search criteria more closely match the devices in the Map View Once you have located the relevant device you may configure it directly from the Search Results box by right clicking on the device icon to open the context menu 182 FOURTEC Search Results Search Resuks 2 matches fo
215. ning a limited number of custom sensors Almost any sensor or transducer with 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA output is accepted by the MicroLogPRO II loggers using the appropriate adapter Electrical units are automatically scaled to meaningful user defined engineering units The sensor definitions are stored in the logger s memory and are added to the sensors list in the Setup window The logger LCD supports the following units for user defined sensors PSI bAr PH mS and PPm These are displayed together with the scaled values All types of user defined units are displayed in the DataSuite software Refer to section 17 8 1 for more details 13 3 4 Sensor Alarms Via the software users can define minimum and maximum alarm levels for each input individually The MicroLogPRO II logger display indicates when the sensor reading is in alarm of any type The symbols AL H and AL L are used in addition to the LED alarm indicator 13 3 5 Sensor Calibration All MicroLogPRO II loggers may be calibrated via the DataSuite software The calibration parameters are sent to the data loggers via USB connection and stored in the logger s memory Refer to section 17 20 for more details 131 T FOURTEC 13 4 Unit Serial Number and Comment Every MicroLogPRO II data logger unit is embedded with a unique serial number The data logger only can be loaded with a descriptive comment to identify its task and location You may add or edit the logger co
216. nit will turn off in order to conserve the battery 3 Once you select the network the logger will automatically join that network and a new message will be displayed on the LCD Joined network ID 026 167 85 Note If the message Join failed appears on the LCD then rescan for the network and try again If the logger continually fails to join then form a new network on the Receiver 4 The LCD will then indicate the following status message Fourtec DataNet Ready 29 FOURTEC If the Receiver is disconnected for any reason the following message is displayed Fourtec No Receiver 5 When the logger joins the network the Logger icon B will automatically appear in the Map View a The symbol indicates the signal strength of the logger in the network b The D symbol indicates that the logger is running from internal battery supply The symbol indicates that the logger is running from external power supply c The symbol indicates that the logger is a new addition to the network and has not yet been configured setup 6 Repeat steps 1 3 for every logger in your system 7 In order to find the physical location of the logger you can right click on the Logger icon in Map View and select Call Unit Beep The logger will then beep 3 5 3 Connecting Mini DataNet Loggers and Mini Repeater to the Network The Mini DataNet loggers DNL804 DNL808 DNL810 and BXT units and Mini Repeater DNR8
217. nline data Statistics view 9 6 2 Logger Tooltip Close the online data window and return to Map View Scroll over the Logger icon and you will see a tooltip displaying the relevant logger information including real time data MicroLite Temperature 32 K Peale Sect 9137425 New ce Battery Level 100 Version 1 0 0 83 Last Sample Time 31 10 11 01 59 43 Internal NTC ML Il 22 20 C Figure 50 Logger tooltip This tool tip is updated with every newly recorded sample 9 6 3 Sensor View Click the Sensor View icon in the tool bar to switch to this view Here you can monitor the data by viewing data display of each individual sensor rather than of each logger 107 a DataSuite File DataNetNetwork Tools Devices Analysis Report Help a te B 0O 0mp hee D D Figure 51 Sensor view e lf the sensor is in alarm the sensor box will change color from green to red just as the Logger icon would e Double clicking the individual sensor box will open the data in the online Graph view 9 7 Downloading Data If the logger is being used as a standalone device you will have to connect it to the computer via USB in order to download the data to the software 1 Connect logger to PC and go to Devices gt Detect Device in the main menu 2 Data download should begin automatically To manually download data right click the logger icon and select Download Data 3 View the downloaded data by doub
218. nnected to USB DataSuite takes the last battery reading recorded to memory 132 FOURTEC Recognizing when MicroLogPRO II Battery needs Replacing If the MicroLogPRO II LCD shuts off immediately upon PC disconnection this means that the logger battery must be replaced The logger is powered via USB when connected to the PC so the LCD will always turn on even if the battery is empty or missing The DataSuite software does not take a measurement of the battery voltage when the logger is connected to the USB so it will not provide indication that the battery is actually 0 Note Following firmware upgrade from v1 31 to v2 00 the battery reading in DataSuite will be viewed as NA until the device is removed from the USB and reconnected to the PC The correct battery reading will then be displayed 13 5 2 Battery Life In optimal conditions the battery s maximum lifespan can range from between one to two years The MicroLogPRO II is able to conserve battery life by placing itself in sleep mode between data recordings While in sleep mode the data logger consumes a minimal amount of power The MicroLogPRO II will then wake up for a few micro seconds whenever it has to record a data sample or display new data on the LCD screen You always have the option of disabling the LCD during logging only to turn on during alarm state Refer to section 17 17 4 for more details 13 5 3 Replacing the Battery Note Removing the logger batter
219. not transmitted to the computer will be permanently lost It must be noted that this scenario is highly unlikely 19 T FOURTEC Chapter 5 DaqLink Overview This chapter provides a general overview of the DagqLink system a DaqLink Introduction Standalone logger measuring up to 6 channels With built in temperature and humidity sensors plus four external probe inputs the DaqLink standalone data logger ensures a low cost reliable and accurate solution The DaqLink logger is a 16 bit mobile data acquisition device for continuous indoor or outdoor data monitoring The DaqLink system is comprised of two data logger models measuring a broad range of parameters on four external inputs for direct measurement and recording of PT 100 thermocouple O to 1 V 4 to 20 mA contact frequency and pulse sensors as well as internal temperature and relative humidity sensors With its high resolution and fast Analog to Digital converter ADC DaqLink data loggers meet the majority of data acquisition requirements in most industrial applications Every DaqLink logger unit is embedded with a unique serial number and can be loaded with a descriptive comment for safe identification An internal clock and calendar keeps track of the time and date of every sample measured DaqLink loggers can automatically activate external alarm events when data is outside a specified range Email and SMS notifications can be sent to predefined contacts The
220. ntenna For extended transmission distance of the logger External NTC 10KQ input Standard input for connecting to NTC probe External NTC 10KQ probe Fourtec supplied NTC probe part of DNL808 and BXT kit 4 2 4 DNL810 The DNL810 doesn t have any external connections It has two internal sensors only temperature and humidity 4 3 DNR8OO Mini Repeater Front Panel Layout o Multi function button 5 Dual color LED indicator Figure 24 DNR800 Mini Repeater front panel Multi function button Use to execute logger commands Dual color LED indicator Indicates status of Repeater such as joining network leaving network etc 45 z FOURTEC 4 4 DNR900 Receiver Repeater Front Panel Layout LCD screen Menu Enter button Scroll button Figure 25 Receiver Repeater front panel LCD screen Displays Receiver Repeater status and network information Menu Enter button Use to enter logger menu options and to execute logger commands Scroll button Use to scroll though menu items and to power on unit 4 5 DNR800 Mini Repeater External Connections e Figure 26 Mini Repeater external connections 12 V Power Socket To connect unit to external power supply Plug in an AC DC 9 12 V adaptor to power the unit There is no battery supply so when disconnected from the adapter the unit will shutdown The adaptor should meet the required specifications Refer to Appendix A DataNet Specifications 46 a s
221. nts have been installed launch IRecamtatelay DataSuite from your DataSuite desktop shortcut slits 3 The main DataSuite window is launched The default view is called Map View Figure 63 Main DataSuite window 140 FOURTEC 4 Check for DataSuite updates Go to Help gt Check for Updates from the DataSuite main menu to check for newer versions of the PicoLite module software and firmware released since you purchased your system For more details on the Update feature go to Chapter 18 Updating DataSuite Software and Firmware 15 3 Connecting the Logger Note Multiple PicoLite loggers may be detected by the PC at a time 1 Only once the DataSuite software has been installed connect the PicoLite data logger via the USB interface 2 Assuming this is the first time the logger is used following purchase it will be in deep sleep mode When connected to the PC the logger will automatically turn on 3 When detected by the PC the logger s green LED will stay on as long as it s connected to the USB port 4 When first detected by the DataSuite software the logger icon will appear in the Map View If the logger icon does not appear ensure the unit is properly connected to the USB port and from the DataSuite main menu go to Devices gt Detect Device 3 DataSuite File DataNet Network Tools Devices Analysis Report Help a m2 40 0 IONET Figure 64 Adding PicoLite logger icon to Map View Note If the logger
222. nts to connect to The user uses the Scroll button to scroll through the Network IDs The relevant network is selected using the Enter button Network 1 Network 2 Rescan networks ID 014 061 082 ID 021 207 175 Once the network has been selected the following screen will be displayed Joined network ID 021 207 175 To rescan the networks simply select the Rescan Networks option and the logger will start the scanning process again If only one network was found the system will automatically connect to that network without the user needing to select the network manually Scan for network Scan complete Joined to network Found 1 network 4 ID 021 207 175 The Repeater display will return to the welcome message which consists of the Repeater name editable via the software and the network status Ready If connection to the DataSuite software is established Software is down If established connection to the Receiver but the DataSuite software is down PC is off software is not open etc No Parent Signal The parent unit either the Receiver or another Repeater is not detected by the Repeater therefore it is not transmitting its data to the network 70 f FOURTEC fourtec DataNet fourtec DataNet fourtec DataNet Ready Software is down No Parent Signal The Repeater will continue to search for the parent unit at specific intervals and the screen will continue to read Search Parent until the parent
223. o wae ies mor 5 Figure 12 Online data Table view wep Scr gt bt Aa wheter O Graph Tabie Satstica Musber of tempti kanec Dwahet hiena Tempe BOT IIE BWC NMANNSL 13021243 1215 founec OmaNet PT 100 2557C 2587C 57C 936012 1244 1309121249 zm Device Sensor Monimur Maeeenum Average Statestics stert Statistics end Figure 13 Online data Statistics view 3 7 2 Logger Tooltip Close the online data window and return to Map View Scroll over the Logger icon and you will see a tooltip displaying the relevant logger information including real time data 34 Network Name DataNet network 2 Network ID 12 135 252 Logger DNL920 Serial Number 912486 test Battery Level 98 Reception Quality 100 Version 3 4 2 36 Last Sample Time 24 10 11 16 20 27 Internal Digital Temperature 23 74 C Figure 14 Logger tooltip This tool tip is updated with every newly recorded sample 3 7 3 Sensor View Click the Sensor View icon in the tool bar to switch to this view Here you can monitor the data by viewing data display of each individual sensor rather than of each logger G DataSuite File DataNet Network Tools Devices Analysis Report Help S ia 40 0 eT p fele ae al Wiotte x T aE Figure 15 Sensor view e lf the sensor is in alarm the sensor window will change color from gree
224. oads all data in the logger memory to the DataSuite software When logger is downloading the data the Logger icon in Map View will appear as follows 1 Cancel Download When logger is downloading data you may cancel the download per logger by selecting this menu item As cancelling the data download results in data not being downloaded to the computer there is a chance that data may be lost if the download isn t completed at a later stage and the logger s cyclic memory has meanwhile erased these readings Calibration Refer to section 17 19 4 on page 224 for an overview of the Calibration feature Note A logger can t be calibrated while it is in Run mode The option will be grayed out You must Stop the logger first Update Firmware Selecting this feature will commence update of the logger firmware as long as the firmware file is situated in the main DataSuite directory Note If the logger is currently in Push to Run or Timer Run mode Update Firmware option will be disabled Setup Refer to section 17 17 on page 196 for an overview of how to setup the logger 198 FOURTEC Multi Setup By using multi setup you can select more than one logger on the Map View and send the same configuration to all of the loggers When this option is selected a dialog will open listing all of the loggers in the multi setup selection Setup File Use the Save Setup option to save a file containing the logger s current setup to an
225. obtained from the Web activation form Enter it into the License Key field in Step 1 and click Unlock 4 DataSuite will now establish communication with the Fourtec server to complete the activation process If successful a confirmation message will appear In the event of any problem in the activation process please contact your Fourtec distributor or Fourtec Customer Support 5 Click Close to return to the DataSuite software 157 FOURTEC 17 3 DataSuite CFR Module Activation and Login Overview Activating the DataSuite CFR module via the activation module refer to section 17 2 above will make the DataSuite environment compliant with FDA 21 CFR Part 11 regulations However prior to CFR module activation or starting the trial period you must first install the Fourtec DatPass Admin software v4 0 0 0 on one other or the same computer in the network Once DatPass is installed the Admin will be required to create a user ID which will enable DataSuite CFR users to login into the system Without this user ID the DataSuite CFR will not be able to login to DataSuite DataSuite CFR Login Instructions 1 Prior to starting the CFR trial period or activating the CFR module the Admin must first install the DatPass software and create a new user ID See DatPass user guide for more details 2 Once DatPass is installed and a valid user has been created return to the CFR activation window in DataSuite to start the trial or activate
226. ocess for all Fourtec loggers involves the following steps 1 Verification of logger accuracy a You must first verify the accuracy of the relevant inputs by running the logger and comparing the input readings against a known accurate reference b If all recorded readings are within their published specifications then you may choose to skip calibration If the readings are not within spec or if they are but you decide to calibrate anyway proceed to Step 2 c You may choose to skip Step 1 and proceed directly to Step 2 if you already Know that the logger is inaccurate or if you wish to calibrate regardless of logger accuracy 2 Logger calibration a Once you have decided that the logger requires calibration you must reset the calibration settings of the input sensor and repeat Step 1a comparing the logger readings using a reference Note Resetting the calibration settings is a critical step as calibration must be performed on the logger s raw values clean of any previous calibration settings To reset calibration refer to section 17 20 3 b Once you have completed Step 2a and recorded the logger readings for the relevant inputs sensors you are able to perform the actual calibration procedure c Use the detailed calibration instructions provided in sections 17 20 317 20 4 and 17 20 5 to understand how to calibrate the logger using DataSuite software d Following completion of calibration procedure in Step 2c you
227. odule software and firmware released since you purchased your system For more details on the Update feature go to Chapter 18 Updating DataSuite Software and Firmware 9 3 Connecting the Logger Note Multiple MicroLite loggers may be detected by the PC at a time 1 Only once the DataSuite software has been installed connect the MicroLite data logger via the USB interface 2 Assuming this is the first time the logger is used following purchase it will be in deep sleep mode When connected to the PC the logger will automatically turn on 3 When turned on the LCD will display Hello followed by the firmware version and finally Stop 4 When first detected by the DataSuite software the logger icon will appear in the Map View If the logger icon does not appear from the DataSuite main menu go to Devices gt Detect Device oo Ootssute es File DataNet Network Tools Devices Analysis Report Help TEETER AKL TOLET Figure 45 Adding data logger icon to Map View Note If the logger is not recognized by the software try connecting the logger to another USB port on the PC Ensure the unit is turned on and select Devices gt Detect Device again in the main menu 5 Should you disconnect the logger s USB cable the logger icon will be grayed out aI Note You can move the logger icon elsewhere on the screen by going to Tools gt Lock Map View and unselecting this option 9 4 Loading Map View Background Load an ima
228. ogger during operation select the Stop on key press option d Select the sampling rate anywhere from 1 every second to 1 every 18 hours Refer to the Recording Time to ensure the logger won t stop or begin cyclic recording before the end of your specific measurement session e Select the Deep sleep mode checkbox to run the logger in deep sleep mode While in Stop mode the logger will shut down after two minutes of inactivity and enter deep sleep in order to conserve battery To wake up from deep sleep the Min Max hour button must be pressed lf deep sleep mode is not selected the logger will always stay on and consume more battery However it can be connected to USB and not require pressing the keypad to wake up Note This feature is only available in firmware v1 01 or higher In the Sensors tab a Select the internal and external sensors you wish to activate during the current logging session b If you require alarm levels select the relevant checkboxes and enter the specific threshold values In the Display tab a Select the appropriate option for the LCD screen If you wish to conserve battery life and do not require a permanent visual data display select the options to turn on the LCD screen only for alarms or button press In the Boomerang Report tab a Enable the Boomerang feature via this tab Enter contacts to receive the data report via email when logger is connected to another computer with DataSuite ins
229. ogger is offline and is no longer detected by the computer Its power supply may have failed or the USB cable was disconnected Logger is processing a command sent from the software Logger is downloading data MicroLite II Icons i i Logger which has received its Setup but is in Stop mode Logger in Run mode Green indicates there are no alarms 166 FOURTEC Logger in Run mode with an alarm alert Logger is offline and is no longer detected by the computer The USB interface was disconnected Logger is processing a command sent from the software Logger is downloading data MicroLogPRO II Icons i gt aD E PicoLite Icons a Ti 7 FE JA f Logger which has received its Setup but is in Stop mode Logger in Run mode Green indicates there are no alarms Logger in Run mode with an alarm alert Logger is offline and is no longer detected by the computer Its power supply may have failed or the USB cable was disconnected Logger is processing a command sent from the software Logger is downloading data Logger in Stop mode Logger in Run mode Green indicates there are no alarms Logger in Run mode with an alarm alert Logger is offline and is no longer detected by the computer The USB interface was disconnected Logger is processing a command sent from the software Logger is downloading data 17 5 7 Graph Lower Toolbar Icons The graph toolbar is located at the bottom of
230. om heating up again following the initial charge cycle the logger will receive a one minute trickle charge each day rather than stay continually charged This is sufficient to ensure the logger doesn t self discharge and will maintain the loggers full charge status Refer to section 4 9 3 for more details on the DataNet loggers power supply 28 f FOURTEC 3 5 2 Connecting DNL910 and DNL920 Loggers to the Network Includes the PA models 1 Turn on the logger by pressing the Scroll button 0 The unit will beep when turned on As soon as the unit is turned on the LCD screen will display the following message Fourtec DataNet Logger 2 The logger will then start scanning for networks The LCD will indicate how many networks were found in range and will announce when the scan is complete Locked networks will not be listed Scan for network Cc Scan for network Scan complete To join the network created by your Receiver there may be other networks created by your colleagues scroll through the found Binet on the LCD using the logger Scroll button and press the Enter button when you reach the required network In the example below the network required is the second network found You can also rescan the networks by pressing Enter on the Rescan networks screen which is reached by scrolling through all the found networks Network 1 Network 2 Rescan networks Note If the logger did not detect a network the u
231. om sensors names Alarm levels Alarm duration Alarm delay Alarm pre delay select the Memory State Online or Optimized Memory Modes Select the sensors you wish to connect to the logger for data acquisition It doesn t matter which order you select the sensors You may only have Input 4 selected for example and Inputs 1 to 3 left unselected Select the sampling rate anywhere from 1 every second to 1 every 18 hours 82 FOURTEC 6 Unless you have Alarm levels you wish to edit see the Alarms Setup tab click either Setup and Run to send the setup and immediately log data or Setup Only to send the setup but only log data at your command 7 If you selected Setup Only in step 5 right click the Logger icon and select Run from the context menu to start logging data or click in the main tool bar 8 The Logger icon will appear as follows when in Run mode tal 9 To stop the logger right click the Logger icon and select Stop from the context menu Note Running the logger clears the logger memory All previously recorded data will be erased when you begin a new logging session 6 7 Viewing Data Once you run the logger you have several ways of viewing the online data that is being acquired e Online graph table statistics views e Logger icon tooltip e Sensor view 6 7 1 Online Data Views Double clicking the Logger icon or selecting Display Data in the Logger icon context menu will open the onlin
232. ommended to turn off the unit when it is not in use 7 8 4 Additional Logger Screens Loading Firmware When updating the firmware of the data logger via the software s Firmware Update Center the logger screen will display the update progress When complete the main logger status screen will be displayed Also refer to Chapter 18 Updating DataSuite Software and Firmware Loading firmware Progress 55 Note Logger must be in Stop mode before firmware can be updated 97 T FOURTEC Chapter 8 MicroLite Overview This chapter provides a general overview of the MicroLite Il generation of data loggers 8 1 MicroLite Introduction Accurate portable cable free range of USB loggers The MicroLite II product family is a compact line of USB data loggers designed for accurate monitoring of various parameters for a wide range of applications Typical applications include cold chain management transportation as well as warehousing of food drugs and hi tech equipment There are two generations of MicroLite data loggers e First generation MicroLite for Temperature monitoring supported by the MicroLab Lite software refer to separate MicroLab Lite user guide for using MicroLite with this software e Second generation MicroLite II for Voltage Current Temperature and Humidity monitoring supported by the DataSuite software The MicroLite II models have enhanced functionality compared to the MicroLite models This us
233. onfiguration and data download purposes for example The USB cable also powers the logger when connected to the PC but it does not charge the internal battery Note The USB driver is installed as part of the software installation process Without this driver the PC won t detect the logger To avoid compatibility problems do not connect the logger to the PC before installing the USB driver A Type B plug fa a Se Connect to PC USB port f A BA Type A plug Connect to logger USB port Figure 43 USB communication cable 7 7 DaqLink Keypad Overview 7 7 1 DBSA710 and DBSA720 Keypad The DBSA710 and DBSA720 units each have two buttons on the keypad which are used to navigate through the LCD menu options as well as turn on the units Refer to section 4 12 to learn how to operate the data loggers 93 7 FOURTEC The Menu button has two functionalities Navigate to the main menu DaqLink When pressed from within a submenu the display will take you back to the main menu Selecting an option from one of the menus When pressed on one of the main menu items it will take you to the sub menu options The Scroll button v has two functionalities When the unit is off pressing this button will power the unit on Scrolls through the menu options 7 8 Operating the DBSA710 and DBSA720 This section explains how to operate the DBSA710 and DBSA720 loggers and provides an overview of the menu op
234. onnected to the AC charger The charging mechanism causes the unit s PCB to heat up which in turn causes the onboard temperature sensor to heat up As it is used for temperature compensation when calibrating the thermocouples it may adversely affect the accuracy of the calibration 17 20 9 Saving and Loading DataNet and DaqLink Calibration Settings The DataSuite software enables you to calibrate any of the logger inputs and saves the calibration parameters to the logger s onboard memory Saving Calibration Settings At any time you may manually save the logger s calibration settings locally to your PC 1 Open the logger context menu select Calibration gt Save Calibration and enter the password to access this feature 2 The Save As dialog will open Name the calibration file with extension dcf and save it either in the default Calibration folder in the DataSuite directory or ina folder of your choice Note The default file name is the logger Comment so it is recommended to change file name to the logger serial number Loading Calibration Settings 1 You can load a previously saved DataSuite dcf calibration file at any time to restore a logger s restore specific calibration settings 2 Open the logger context menu select Calibration gt Load Calibration and enter the password to access this feature 3 Inthe Open dialog browse to the calibration file you need and click Open The logger will be updated with the ne
235. op down menu select the unit by which you wish to group the plots Uncheck the Autoscale check box and enter the custom values in the text box Click OK To restore auto scaling select the Autoscale checkbox Figure 101 Grouping plots by units 239 T FOURTEC 17 21 2 Viewing Time Stamps MicroLite or MicroLogPRO II users may mark time stamps on the logger memory to indicate specific events and later view them in DataSuite software In the Online and Offline graph views the lower toolbar features a Time Stamp icon se By default it is enabled to display all time stamps marked in the current data set Each time stamp is marked as a large dot in the same color as the sensor plot scrolling over the time stamp marker will display the time stamp comment which by default is the time stamp of the sample itself Viewing the time stamp in Table View Each time stamp is displayed in the data table in addition to the regular samples taken at the defined sampling rate The time stamp is highlighted in yellow and a default comment is listed in the Comment column per device To edit the time stamp comment simply click on the relevant cell and enter the desired comment Graph Table Statistics Internal NTC 10K Comment 7005737 7005737 Index Date and Time Lab 1 F Lab 1 F 17590 16 08 11 17 41 06 25 49 C 9 16 2011 5 41 06 PM 17551 16 08 11 17 41 07 254E 17502 16 08 11 17 41 08 25 49 17553 16 08 11 17 41 09 25 49
236. or approve reports generated by the software Select Reviewed Report and or Approved Report and select the required contacts from the Contacts dialog Recipients of these reports will be able to enter the DataSuite CFR using their assigned username and in the Reports Browser declare the report was reviewed or approved 15 In the Report Type pane select at least one of the report type checkboxes You will not be able to save the profile unless a report type has been selected 16 The available types are below For more details regarding each type refer to section 17 24 2 240 Alarm Log Events Log Unit Setup Log Unit Statistics Sent Email Log Sent SMS Log Received SMS Log Sensors Graph Sensor Histogram 17 Once a Report Type has been selected immediately click Save Profile to avoid losing your unsaved profile 18 Use the Report Time pane to select the interval when the report will be generated and emailed to the contact list if desired a Next to Generate Report at select the time when the report should be generated Note To allow for data samples recorded in the last minute prior to the defined time the report will actually be generated 10 minutes after the defined time b Select the date when the report should be generated The options are daily weekly or monthly Select the specific day for the latter two options c The user can also select a report according to a specific time period
237. ormatting the Graph You can change the plot line s color and width The color of the Y axis matches the corresponding plot s color and will automatically change with any change made to the color of the corresponding plot oo SY Click Graph properties on the graph toolbar Click the Style tab and unselect the Use system line properties checkbox Select the axis you want to format in the Axis drop down menu Select the color and line width Click OK To restore the default formatting select the Use system line properties checkbox again Manual Scaling Click Graph properties on the graph toolbar Select the Axis Scaling tab and with the Group plots by units checkbox unselected select the axis to manually scale from the drop down menu e g Date amp Time axis Uncheck the Autoscale check box and enter the custom values in the text box i e a time range in the case of the Time amp Date axis or a set of values Click OK To restore auto scaling select the Autoscale checkbox Manual Scaling Grouping Plots by Unit You may choose to group all of the sensors measuring the same unit to the same scale For example if you have several temperature sensors in your data set all measuring Celsius you can apply a common scale when displaying the data from these sensors eS Se YS Click Graph properties onthe graph toolbar Select the Axis Scaling tab and select the Group plots by units checkbox In the Axis dr
238. ow to operate the Receiver and Repeater 56 f FOURTEC The Menu button has two functionalities Navigate to the main menu When pressed from within a submenu the display will take you back to the main menu Selecting an option from one of the menus When pressed on one of the main menu items it will take you to the sub menu options The Scroll button Cv has two functionalities e When the unit is off pressing this button will power the unit on e Scrolls through the menu options 4 11 2 DNL8XX and DNL8XX BXT Keypad The Mini DataNet units have one button on the keypad This button is multi functional and is used to perform various functions such as e Turning on off the unit e Starting signal test e Leaving the network e Locating device icon in software Map View Refer to section 4 13 to learn how to operate the Mini DataNet and Mini Repeater devices 4 12 Operating the DNL910 and DNL920 This section explains how to operate the DNL910 DNL920 and PA model loggers and provides an overview of the menu options on the units LCD screen 4 12 1 Turning on the Unit In order to view the logger menu options the unit must be powered on by pressing the Scroll button the AC adapter Once the unit is switched on it will emit a short beep and the screen will read Search Parent until the Parent unit e g Receiver is detected A welcome message is the displayed Fourtec DataNet Ready o
239. p the logger to calibrate on that input 5 Click Reset Calibration Note If performing Offset calibration Reset Calibration is not required 6 You may now begin entering the calibration values based on the relevant calibration method e g two or three point Offset 17 20 4 Performing a Two or Three point Calibration The purpose of using two or three reference points when calibrating your logger is to ensure accuracy over a specific measurement range e g using 2 C and 8 C as reference points for applications involving vaccine measurement The two or three point calibration sets the gain slope and offset intercept of the sensor s conversion function DataSuite provides default reference values for each input for both two and three point calibration You may also enter custom values relevant to your application s required measurement range In either case the reference values used to calculate the calibration settings must reflect the actual recorded values of the reference equipment e g if the climate chamber recorded 33 2 when set to measure 33 then you must enter 33 2 as the reference value In some cases you may need to refine your calibration using the Offset method refer to section 17 20 5 Note Two or three point calibration must not be performed over a previous two or three point calibration This includes following restoration of default factory calibration 228 FOURTEC Reference Value and Log
240. ph header Indication of sensor name sensor type start time amp date and end time amp date under each graph A small graph of each sensor that is defined in the logger with its alarm levels displayed according to the alarm colors The graph will be created according to the last logger setup The graph scaling will be set to autoscale The graph will include grid lines The alarm levels will be marked according to the alarm color and the alarm limit value will be indicated on the Y axis The graph dimensions will be 7 5 cm x 10 5 cm Sensor Histogram Unit comment and S N indicated as the graph header Under each Histogram there will be indication of the sensor name sensor type start time amp date and end time amp date A small histogram of each sensor defined in the logger will be displayed The histogram will include an indication of the value of each bin on top of the bin The graph dimensions will be 7 5 cm x 10 5 cm 17 24 3 Removing a Report Profile To remove an existing report profile 1 Go to Reports gt Reports Profile Manager in the main menu or click the corresponding icon e in the upper toolbar In the Profile list on the left side of the window right click the Report name to be removed and select Remove from the context menu Enter the system password and when prompted confirm the action 243 T FOURTEC 17 24 4 The Report Browser Use the Report Browser to e Open or delete generated r
241. played e Minimum Maximum values e Average value e Number of samples You will also see the Logger name and SN as well as the start and end time of the Statistics data range While in online mode these statistics are updated in real time lf you zoom onto a section of the graph the statistics are dynamic and will therefore display statistics of the zoomed graph not of the whole graph lf using the cursors the statistics will be calculated according to the data set between the two cursors Nimim of meee Humbe herer Seven Meee deems New ege shgteetors what Magpies amd Figure 102 Statistics View 23 T FOURTEC 17 22 Exporting Data to Excel or CSV Formats DataSuite supports exporting data to Excel or CSV file formats CSV stands for comma separated values To export to Excel click Export to Excel A in the online or offline lower graph toolbar or go to Analysis gt Export to Excel while viewing data in History View The data currently displayed on the graph is exported Data from more than one data logger may be exported simultaneously DataSuite will then open a new Excel workbook displaying the data as well as other pertinent information such as logger comment serial number and the alarm level setup Data that exceeds any of the alarm levels will be indicated B Freezer 1 F Freezer 1 F B5007 B5007 Internal Digital Temperature Internal RH a0 Time Internal Digital Temperature Alarm Type
242. ption 249 f FOURTEC 7 Check for updsies automaticaly ance every d 1 tarih C Prompt balora downloading updates Downlosd and mal atomebcaly K Figure 107 Uptodata configuration dialog Note If the update was canceled for any reason and was not completed none of the previous installation files will be affected 18 2 Updating Device Firmware There are several ways to update firmware for your DataSuite supported hardware units e Automatically using the Uptodata client Refer to section 18 1 e Manually using the Firmware Update Center Refer to section 18 2 2 e Manually using the context menu on the device icons in Map View 18 2 1 Downloading the Firmware File There are two ways to obtain the firmware file 1 Using the Uptodata client to download from the Fourtec server Refer to section 18 1 2 Downloading the latest firmware version directly from the Fourtec Download Center at www fourtec com 3 Uptodata downloads the firmware file named Firmware dfw to the DataSuite directory on the computer The default path is C Program Files Fourtec DataSuite Note The firmware file combines firmware for all DataSuite supported hardware units into one file There is no need to download separate files for each type of unit 4 If you download the firmware file from the Fourtec Download Center make sure to copy the file to the same path listed above 5 Once the file is downloaded
243. ption will reset the alarm state to normal on both the logger and the software The visual and audible alarms will return to normal If after reset the logger is still in alarm conditions then the visible and audible alarms will return Call Unit Beep This feature sends a command to the logger to emit intermittent audible beeps for up to one minute This is useful when trying to physically locate a logger in your facility Press the Menu button on the logger to stop the audible alarm Calibration Refer to section 17 19 4 on page 224 for an overview of the Calibration feature Note A logger can t be calibrated while it is in Run mode The option will be grayed out You must Stop the logger first Update Firmware Refer to section 18 2 on page 250 for an overview of the Update Firmware feature Leave Network Selecting this feature will kick the logger off the network The logger will reset and will start scanning for a new network to join You will be prompted to enter a password when selecting this feature 189 f FOURTEC Note The default password is 1234 Setup Refer to section 17 17 on page 196 for an overview of how to setup the logger Multi Setup By using multi setup you can select more than one logger on the Map View and send the same configuration to all of the loggers When this option is selected a dialog will open listing all of the loggers in the multi setup selection Stop Sends a command to th
244. r Back Next O Yy sa Figure 71 Personal information registration window 2 DataSuite will now establish communication with the Fourtec server to complete the activation process If successful a confirmation message will appear In the event of any problem in the activation process please contact your Fourtec distributor or Fourtec Customer Support Note If your Internet connection is via a Proxy server for example then the registration process will fail and an error message will pop up 3 Click Close to return to the DataSuite software 156 FOURTEC Activation via Internet Connection on another Computer 1 After entering the software serial number a window providing additional activation instructions will open le Product Acteshon bene mt DaqgLink OM ler Actreaban gt y ra fih O im A f Copy the key below and contaci your local vend rondaj to ye artt f f need to ponde bot your SW and the key oven belcoe Appbcaton Key 1IRSEOPEZ wew hou emys Conver tog s D ered fe Bac e y Ext Figure 72 Activating DataSuite from another computer 2 Follow the steps as outlined in the window Note It is recommended to generate a text file containing both the Application Key i and the Web registration form URL Press the al icon Transfer this file to the computer with Internet connection as the registration process must be continued from there 3 Record the License Key
245. r memory 10 8 Logger Cap for External Input Models The MicroLite II external input models current voltage temperature feature an industrial screw to wire interface located inside the logger cap This enables connection with the logger s USB connector making data sampling possible When the cap is not connected to the logger no sampling is possible Hence these models do not support online data sampling 10 8 1 External Sensor Cap Detection Mechanism The data logger has a specific mechanism for detecting whether or not the cap is connected in order to prevent logging of invalid data For example if the logger is in Run mode and the cap with external sensor has accidentally been removed invalid data may be recorded With the cap detection mechanism the logger is able to determine if the cap is connected and if not it will cease logging until the cap is reconnected The mechanism functions as follows e When disconnecting the logger from the computer USB port following Setup and Run Timer Run or Push to Run modes the logger will search for the cap every second for the duration of one minute The logger LCD will display NC No Cap If the cap is connected during this time the logger will detect it and the LCD will immediately switch to whichever mode was originally configured e lf the cap has not been detected after this one minute is up the LCD will continue to display NC and the logger will then search for the cap once every
246. r reading to rise by up to 10 C above ambient temperature Once the charging process is complete the logger will cool down and the internal temperature sensor readings will return to normal For loggers remaining connected to AC power to prevent the logger from heating up again following the initial charge cycle the logger will receive a one minute trickle charge each day rather than stay continually charged This is sufficient to ensure the logger doesn t self discharge and will maintain the loggers full charge status 7 5 2 Power Adapter The DagLink power adapter is used to power the DBSA710 and DBSA720 units The mains adaptor AC DC adaptor converts mains power from a wall outlet to a voltage suitable to the DagLink hardware unit e Output Capacitor filtered 9 to 12 VDC 300 mA e Female plug center negative O O T FOURTEC Note Only use Fourtec supplied power adapters to avoid damaging the units with incorrect power supply 7 5 3 Data Logger Battery Life Battery life depends on the logger sampling rate type of sensor and number of measured sensors DBSA710 and DBSA720 can last up to six months on a charged battery depending on logger configuration 7 6 USB Communication Cable A mini USB communication cable is supplied as part of the DataSuite software kit This cable connects the DaqLink data logger to the DaqLink PC workstation When connected to the PC the logger can communicate with the software for c
247. r the old data when the memory is full beginning with the earliest data recording This option is available in the Setup window e Timer Run The logger can be configured to start recording at a predetermined time When the logger is set for such a run its status is set to Timer Run and is indicated as tRUN on the LCD e Push to Run The logger will only begin logging data when the user pushes both of the unit s buttons for 3 seconds e Marking a Time Stamp When the logger is running pressing both logger buttons for over 2 seconds will record a new sample with a time stamp on the logger memory Each time stamp can mark a specific event such as the logger has reached its destination if used during to record temperature during product transportation The time stamp is visible both in the DataSuite data graph and table and the user can enter a comment in the table describing the event There is capacity for a maximum of 99 time stamps in the logger memory When the memory is full the LCD will display FULL when both buttons are 135 FOURTEC pressed together for over two seconds To reset the Time Stamp memory perform a new logger setup If running the logger in cyclic mode time stamps marked during an earlier cycle will not be downloaded to the software Only time stamps from the current cycle will be downloaded 13 9 2 Turning on the Unit To turn on the unit from deep sleep mode the LCD and LED are both
248. re 7 Internal Humidity Sensor Type Custom Sensor Name E Input 1 E Input 2 E Input 3 E Input 4 Setup and Run Setup Only Close Figure 87 DataNet Device Setup tab Comment This is the name of the logger It is advisable to name the logger according to the location in the facility Note The Comment field in the software and on the logger display supports all standard alphanumeric characters except for the following amp Sampling Rate Sampling rate is one sample per second to one sample per 18 hours However there are programming limitations you must be aware of when configuring the loggers The sampling rate will vary depending on the number and type of sensors you setup Refer to section 4 7 5 on page 49 Transmission Interval You can define how often the logger will actually transmit to the network You may wish to have the logger transmit with every sample if you have slower sampling rates or less frequently if you have a fast sampling rate The transmission interval must be a multiple of the sampling rate so for example if the sampling rate is 3 seconds then the minimum transmission rate must be every 3 seconds and then every 6 seconds 9 seconds and so on 204 FOURTEC This parameter was designed to ease the burden on the network if you have many loggers as each logger can transmit at different rates Averaging Points You can choose have online averagi
249. ree click Next to continue In specific versions of Windows the user may have User Account Control UAC settings activated If so the user will be prompted the following instructions Select the relevant option UAC Settings UAC appears to be activated on your computer In order to be UAC compliant DataSuite data files can be accessed by just one user invoker mode and any number of administrators elevated privileges mode lf you wish to register the current user click Next otherwise click Exit and run the application logged on as the designated user to be registered on this machine Note DataSuite will still be available to other users on this machine provided application is run with elevated privileges or UAC is turned off Bt Back If you have an existing activated DataNet installation on the same computer then DataSuite will detect it You have the option to convert all data files from these previous installations into a format recognized by DataSuite This will allow you to view all archived data in DataSuite as well as in the legacy software Click Next to convert the data or Skip to skip this step If you skip you will not be able to convert the data files later Data Conversion A previous installation of DataNet has been detected Click Next below eas renee data into the new format or skip if you wish to skip is step C Program Files Founer Systems DataNet 3 12 You have reached the end of t
250. rence that may cause undesired operation 2 5 FOURTEC DNL810 FCC ID XGO DNL8XX This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is Subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 2 6 T FOURTEC Appendix I Ordering Information For the full list of Fourtec products sensors and accessories and to place Fourtec orders please visit http Awww fourtec com or contact your local Fourtec distributor Product Suite Data Loggers only Part Number Product Name Product Description DNR900 7 _ DNL910A 7 DNL920A VW DNL920A PA VW DNL810A BXT DNL808A BXT DataNet Receiver Repeater DataNet Temp Data Logger DataNet Temp RH Data Logger DataNet Temp RH Data Logger with Power Amplifier Mini DataNet Temp RH Logger Mini DataNet External Temp Logger 2 1 Two mode module for creating and managing DataNet ZigBee network and extending network transmission range e Internal Temperature PT 100 sensor e Four channels mA V mV TC K J T PT 100 Pulse Frequency Contact e Internal Digital RH and Temperature sensors e Four channels mA V mV TC K J T PT 100 Pulse Frequency Contact e Internal Digital RH and T
251. rences tab in Tools gt Options 17 24 1 Creating a Report Profile The first step when creating a report is to create a new Report Profile The user can create multiple profiles each configured with different parameters To generate a report at least one profile must be enabled 1 Go to Reports gt Reports Profile Manager in the main menu or click the corresponding icon in the upper toolbar 2 Enter the system password The Reports Profile Manager window will open 3 Click Create New Profile aah Bnports Protie Menager J me me Figure 105 Reports Profile Manager window 4 Select the Enable Report Profile checkbox to enable all fields in the window Each profile that is enabled will have a report generated If no profiles are enabled DataNet will not generate any reports 5 Enter a suitable profile name in the Profile Name field 6 Enter your name in the Report Generated By field 7 Enter a description of the report in the Report Comment field 239 FOURTEC 8 Each report created in PDF format contains a header To change the report s header select the PDF Header Image checkbox and click Browse to locate the relevant image The default Fourtec header is po fourtesc 9 s aw p Note The recommended header dimensions are 525 x 50 pixels 72 dpi If a header with different dimensions is loaded then the software will automatically resize the header dimensions 10 Toggle the temperatur
252. requency 2 4 GHz e Network units Up to 65 000 e Data rate 250 Kbps e Full mesh network architecture supported e 128 bit network security encryption e Worldwide license free e Transmission strength DNL8xx and DNL9xx 4 dom DNR900 DNL9xx PA 17 dom DNR800 20 dbm DNR900 DNL910 DNL920 DNL910 PA and DNL920 PA Hardware Specifications Display e 2 row LCD e 16 character display 208 Power Supply e Battery Internal rechargeable 4 8 V 800 mAh NiMH battery 2 batteries in series Battery Life DNR900 DNLOXX PA 3 hours DNL910 DNL920 Up to 10 months depending on logger configuration and operating conditions e AC Power External 12 V DC input 300 mA 3 6 VA Center Negative Operating Temperature Range e 20to 50 C e Water and dust proof IP54 DNR900 PC Communication e USB 2 0 compliance e Mini USB type B cable Casing e Plastic ABS box e Dimensions 9 7 x 9 3 x 2 7 cm e Weight 200 g e Table and wall mounting DNR800 Hardware Specifications Power Supply e External 12 V DC input 300 mA 3 6 VA e Center Negative e No internal battery Casing e Dimensions 6 8 x 6 8 x 2 6 cm without the cradle and the external antenna e Weight Device 61 g Cradle 10 g External Antenna 17 5 g e Table and wall mounting Operating Temperature Range e 30t0 75 C e Water and dust proof IP54 209 Ww Mini DataNet Hardware Specifications DNL804 DNL808 and DNL810 Power Supply e Internal 2 3
253. requiring activation click ACTIVATE to launch the activation window You may also click START TRIAL to run a 30 trial prior to activating the product DataSuite will not detect your devices unless you select one of these two options Note MicroLite MicroLogPRO II and PicoLite are license free and therefore don t require activation If using these products select the checkbox and click Next 8 If you clicked ACTIVATE in step 11 above the DataSuite software activation window will open on the relevant module e g DagLink a Q Frocsct Actovater g Start your 30 dey trial penod oF actreate Da merkie umng he horme bey kercim he e nn Actvater yis ihe rterret AC vAn wie an inba Corrector or soother Cotan Stee wis a You may choose to start the trial to commence the free 30 day trial period Click Start Trial and then click Next The full module activation can be completed at a later stage For full details on activating the product refer to section 17 2 152 10 11 z FOURTEC b Once the trial period has started DataSuite will detect the connected loggers To detect more than one product module at the same time you must ensure that each module is either in trial mode or activated using the unique software serial number c When completing the necessary tasks in the Activation window click Exit to return to the Welcome window lf you did not choose to activate the product or if the product is license f
254. rner toortec Date et Sampling rate bh ma neo 9 FumMaAGe renon Transressions eteryal a4 OR00D1 Connected to AC ichergeg Aver agny parts None a Feceptin Quality 100 lemperstturewrts ion LOD only amp C Recording ime Og 04 279 36 J trternal Terpersture Figure 10 Logger Setup window This dialog provides non editable information such as the serial number battery level reception level and firmware version of the current unit On the Device Setup and Alarm Setup tabs the user is able to configure the following parameters 32 f FOURTEC Unit s comment Sampling rate Transmission interval Samples averaging Temperature units C F on the logger LCD Not applicable for Mini DataNet loggers Active sensors Custom sensors names Alarm levels Alarm duration Alarm delay Alarm pre delay 3 Select the sensors you wish to connect to the logger for data acquisition It doesn t matter which order you select the sensors You may only have Input 4 selected for example and Inputs 1 to 3 left unselected 4 Select the sampling rate and transmission interval rate at which the data is transmitted from the logger to the Receiver 5 Unless you have Alarm levels you wish to edit see the Alarms Setup tab click either Setup and Run to send the setup and immediately log data or Setup Only to send the setup but only log data at your command 6 If you selected Setup Only in step 4 righ
255. rrect 1 Once the SMS configuration is complete and the GSM modem has been detected by the software the Test SMS buiton will be enabled 2 Click Test SMS to open the Contact Information dialog 3 Select a contact from the DataSuite contact list or enter a telephone number Click OK to send the test SMS 4 The test Email will contain the following content Subject Test message sent from the DataSuite software Body This is a test message sent from the DataSuite software Sent on the dd mm yy mm hh 17 9 5 Analysis Menu Items The Analysis menu items are enabled when viewing offline data in History View The Analysis options available are e Calculate Dew Point e Calculate MKT e FO Pasteurization e Histogram e Export to Excel e Export to CSV MKT Mean Kinetic Temperature Mean Kinetic Temperature or MKT is used for calculating temperature stress of perishable stock goods such as medicines or food during storage and distribution cycles The MKT is calculated on a temperature graph opened from an offline DataSuite data file in History View To use the MKT feature 1 Go to File gt Open and open the data file containing the relevant temperature measurements 2 In History View with the graph tab in view go to Analysis gt MKT in the main menu The MKT dialog is opened 179 FOURTEC 3 MKT Lab 1 F 9130212 Internal Digital Temperature Activation Energy 60 0000 iB KJ mol Low Limit 0 0000
256. rrect information or commands not being sent promptly to the end units Note The software automatically refreshes the network connections every 10 minutes 193 FOURTEC Show Network Paths While in Map View enable this option to display the path that the RF signal of all units in the network takes to reach the Receiver If Repeaters are used in the network it will show the signal routed via the Repeater en route to the Receiver iy rT Le A Fy a a n M The paths are color coded so you can also see the transmission strength A legend appears at the bottom of the window Transmission Strength SE i e Red Low 0 to 23 strength e Yellow Medium 23 to 56 e Green High 56 to 100 Mini DataNet Device Filter When working with Mini DataNet units you have the option to enable a filter which determines which device can be allowed onto the DataNet network according to the device Serial Number Recommended when managing multiple networks in the same environment Refer to section 3 5 3 for more details Change to Repeater Use this feature to convert the unit from Receiver to Repeater mode Do not perform this operation on a Receiver with a dedicated network as the network and all related devices will then go offline 17 16 10 Viewing DataNet Receiver Status When you scroll the mouse cursor over the Receiver icon a tooltip will pop up displaying data relevant to the Receiver status at
257. rsion 1 10 Last Sample Time 06 12 12 23 03 33 PicoLite Temperature 74 50 C In online mode the logger displays e Device model and memory size e Serial Number e Device Name e Battery status in e Logger firmware version number e Last sample time If logger is running time stamp of last recorded sample e Real time Temp sensor value including alarm status 17 17 Configuring the Logger DataSuite software allows you to configure each logger via direct USB connection or wirelessly in the case of DataNet To configure the logger once it s detected by the DataSuite software right click the Logger icon in the Map View and select Setup The setup dialogs for each of the supported products differ as each model has different parameters Each Setup window is described below 17 17 1 DataNet Device Setup Tab The DataNet Setup window has two tabs Device Setup and Alarm Setup The main logger configuration is performed on the Device Setup tab Any alarm levels you wish to configure is performed on the Alarm Setup tab 203 z FOURTEC G Setup Running etwork Name DataNet network 2 ETT N p Comment Freezer Serial number Comment on LCD Freezer Sampling rate h m s 00 00 10 Firmware version Transmissions interval Od 00 00 10 v Battery Level 86 Averaging points 4 7 Reception Quality 100 Temperature units on LCD only C Recording time 1d 20 56 00 Internal Temperatu
258. rt trial option and click Next To activate the software refer to chapter 17 2 The main DataSuite window is launched The default view is called Map View D disa E o o oi u brete Figure 5 Main DataSuite window Check for DataSuite updates Go to Help gt Check for Updates from the DataSuite main menu to check for newer versions of the DataNet module software and firmware released since you purchased your system For more details on the Update feature go to Chapter 18 Updating DataSuite Software and Firmware 3 4 Connecting the Receiver i Only once the DataSuite software has been installed and activated either by starting the Trial or activating the module with a serial number connect the DataNet Receiver Repeater unit DNR900 to the Fourtec supplied power adapter 26 T FOURTEC Note Only use adapters provided by Fourtec Use of the wrong adapter could damage your DataNet units 2 Turnon the unit by pressing the Scroll button v on the front keypad The unit will beep when turned on 3 Verify that the unit is in Receiver mode by seeing the following screen on the LCD Receiver ID 123 456 789 4 The ID will be unique to your Receiver network If the unit is in Repeater mode switch it to Receiver mode Go to section 4 15 for more details 5 Connect the mini USB cable to the computer and to the Receivers mini USB port The DataNet Receiver icon KS will immediately appear in th
259. ry time data is transferred to the computer it is labeled both with the logger s serial number and comment and is displayed in the graph or data table view The unit serial number is also marked on a sticker below the units USB connector 10 4 Power Supply The MicroLite data loggers run from one internal replaceable CR2032 3V lithium battery Depending on the logger model configuration and operating conditions from a new battery the data logger can run for up to 2 years The battery maintains the logger s Real Time Clock RTC The logger s time date settings are synchronized with the PC when you perform a Setup 111 T FOURTEC Note When connected to the PC via USB the logger will draw its power via the USB port and not via the internal battery 10 4 1 Battery Level Indication The MicroLite battery level indication is viewed as follows e On the logger LCD e Inthe DataSuite logger Setup dialog and logger icon tooltip in Map View Battery Level on Logger LCD e 4 segment battery icon is displayed on the logger LCD it is always displayed The definition of each segment Is 3 segments 100 2 segments 50 gt 99 segment 25 gt 49 0 segments 0 gt 24 Measurement of Battery Voltage The battery voltage is measured as follows e Each time the device is removed from the USB and is updated in the software upon reconnection to PC e When the logger is in Run mode and not connected to the USB it
260. s 4 Inthe Power Saving Settings tab a Configure the LCD screen If you wish to conserve battery life and do not require a permanent visual data display select the options to turn on the LCD screen only for alarms or button press b Configure the LED which indicates logger alarm status while logger is running 5 Inthe Boomerang Report tab a Enable the Boomerang feature via this tab Enter contacts to receive the data report via email when logger is connected to another computer with DataSuite installed Refer to section 17 25 for more details 6 From any of the tabs click Setup and Run to begin logging or Setup if you wish to run the logger later 7 The Logger icon will appear as follows when in Run mode io 8 For the external input logger models the logger LCD will display NC No Cap when placed in Run mode This is because the logger won t actually begin recording data until the logger cap is closed on the logger body to connect the logger to the USB the cap must first be removed Therefore ensure that the cap is connected to an external sensor before closing it on the logger to avoid erroneous data For more details on the logger cap detection mechanism refer to section 10 8 1 9 To stop the logger right click the Logger icon and select Stop from the context menu Or use the magnet key if you previously enabled the Stop on key press option Note Running the logger clears the logger memory All previou
261. s These models range from loggers with graphic display AC or battery power supply and power amplification to models with no display and battery power only Data is transmitted from the end units to a Receiver connected to a central computer The system leverages the ZigBee protocol a 2 4 GHz license free frequency RF band to ensure full data integrity By adding DataNet Repeater units or loggers with power amplification to the network you can extend the transmission range and form a reliable mesh network of up to 65 000 units With its high resolution and fast Analog to Digital converter ADC DataNet data loggers meet the majority of data acquisition requirements in most industrial applications Every DataNet logger unit is embedded with a unique serial number and can be loaded with a descriptive comment for safe identification An internal clock and calendar keeps track of the time and date of every sample measured DataNet loggers can automatically activate external alarm events when data is outside a specified range Email and SMS notifications can be sent to predefined contacts The DataNet system is powered by the powerful DataSuite software The Windows based software is the central management interface of the DataNet network Data is monitored online and can be displayed in graphs or tables You can analyze data with various mathematical tools or export data to a spreadsheet Detailed reports can also be generated from the syste
262. s All Users Application Data Fourtec DataSuite Text Files 174 FOURTEC e Default path on Windows 7 C Users Public Fourtec DataSuite T ext Files Click Browse to change this path e g to a network path Note The text file cannot be updated with logger data as long as it is open Make sure to close the file when you finish inspecting the data or copy the file to another location and view it from there Alternatively open the file in Read only mode Path for Report files The default path where Report files are stored is e Default path on WinXP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Fourtec DataSuite Reports e Default Path on Windows 7 C Users Public Fourtec DataSuite Reports Click Browse to change this path e g to a network path Default Paths lf the user has modified any of the default data file or report paths e g to a network path and should this path become available for any reason then the DataSuite application will automatically refer to the default path as shown under the Default Paths heading This precaution is necessary as otherwise DataSuite cannot download any data from the data loggers if the data file path is not available Data can therefore be lost e Default path on WinXP C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Fourtec DataSuite e Default path on Windows 7 C Users Public Fourtec DataSuite 17 9 2 Device Settings Tab aces i T n Preferences Device Settings
263. s a network The LED will be fixed green for five seconds and the logger icon will display and blink for eight seconds in the software Map View The logger will connect to the first network it finds 65 FOURTEC The logger doesn t find a network After 60 seconds of failed attempts to find a network the logger will shut down Note The logger won t find a network if its serial network wasn t entered in the Device Filter if the filter is enabled the Receiver isn t online or if the network is locked right click on the Receiver menu to unlock 3 Once the logger has joined the network you may configure it to start recording data Refer to section 17 17 DNR800 The DNR800 functionality for joining a network is the same as for the other Mini DataNet units The only difference is that to turn on the Mini Repeater you can also just connect the unit to its external power supply When turned on it will automatically search for networks 4 13 3 Rescanning for Networks If the unit has joined another network i e not yours then you will have to leave that network and rescan for new networks This requires first shutting off the unit and then leaving the current network 1 Make sure the unit serial number is entered into the Mini DataNet Device Filter 2 Turn the unit off by pressing and holding the unit button until the LED emits a fixed red light for at least three seconds 3 Release the unit button 4 To leave
264. s from a maximum of one sample every second to a minimum of one sample every 18 hours However there are certain limitations using a specific combination of sensors which must be taken into account when programming the DagLink data loggers Note The software integrates all programming limitations automatically when configuring the loggers Please refer to the table below for DagLink programming limitations where PT100 Thermocouple J K or T A Internal Digital Temperature on B DBSA720 Sensor Maximum Sampling Rate Example Setup Combination 3xXA One sample every three seconds In 1 PT 100 4xA In 2 TC J A B In 3 TC J 2x A B One sample every four seconds Internal Temp 3x A B In 1 TC T In 2 PT 100 4x A B One sample every five seconds Internal Temp In 1 TC T In 2 TC J In 3 PT 100 In 4 PT 100 Table 3 Data Logger programming limitations 7 3 6 External Alarm Output The DagLink system supports connection of an external alarm e g siren audible alarm to In 1 of the DBSA710 and DBSA720 data loggers When connected to the logger the external alarm will be activated only when that logger is in alarm status Once there is no alarm status the external alarm will be deactivated Data Logger External Alarm In 1 of the DBSA710 and DBSA720 serves either as a standard sensor input or as an external alarm output Ensure the logger is connected to AC power if connected to an external alarm Configure I
265. s kit 13 2 Data Logger External Connections External connections of the EC800 and EC850 are exactly the same External sensor input Mini USB Figure 61 EC800 and EC850 external connections Mini USB Port To enable communication between logger and PC for configuration and data download Sensor Inputs 3 pin socket supporting range of MicroLogPRO II external sensor adapters and probes Note The MicroLogPRO II ships with a rubber plug that covers each of the external sockets The plug protects the sockets from moisture and dust Unless you are using the sockets leave the plugs in 13 3 Data Logger Sensor Overview This section provides an overview of the hardware specifications of the MicroLogPRO II data loggers 130 FOURTEC 13 3 1 Internal Sensor Types The EC800 and EC850 loggers include internal sensors depending on the logger model Measurement Logger oo Sensor Mange Accuracy odel Digital Humidity 5 to 95 2 EC850 Digital o o o Temperature 40 C to 80 C 0 3 C EC850 Temperature r 0 o NTC 40 C to 80 C 0 3 C EC800 13 3 2 External Sensor Types The EC800 and EC850 each has one external input for connection to a range of adapters and probes Measurement Current Adapter 4 to 20 mA 20 uA Voltage Adapter Oto 10 V 5 mV Temperature NTC 10K Probe 50 to 110 C 0 3 C 13 3 3 User Defined Sensors DataSuite software provides a simple and straightforward tool for defi
266. s launched it automatically scans all ports for DataSuite supported devices Select this menu item to manually detect devices 180 FOURTEC Scanning for Devices 9 9 Ea DataNet Daglink MicroLogPRO II MicroLite PicoLite All devices are automatically detected by the software when connected to the computer If you connect a device when it is switched off and then switch the device on the software won t detect the unit You will have to use the Detect Devices feature The device may also lose power and go offline while connected to the USB in which case you will also need to detect it manually The Devices menu also supports Stop All and Run All commands for all connected loggers 17 10 2 Stop All To stop all the online loggers in the Map View simultaneously go to the Devices gt Stop All menu item Prior to stopping the loggers DataSuite will first download and data not already transmitted to the computer This feature is password enabled 17 10 3 Run All To run all the online loggers in the Map View simultaneously go to the Devices gt Run All menu item Prior to running the loggers DataSuite will first clear the logger menu This command will not apply to any devices currently in Timer Run or Push to Run modes This feature is password enabled 17 10 4 Auto Setup Mode Note This feature currently supports MicroLite II MicroLogPRO II and PicoLite The Auto Setup feature is an extremely conve
267. s to the default Fourtec wallpaper 12 5 Configuring the Logger Once the software has detected the MicroLogPRO II logger you must configure the unit in order to start acquiring data 1 Right click on the Logger icon Select Setup from the context menu 2 The Setup window will be launched Setup for EC850 8888888 Sensors Display Boomerang Report Identifiers SN 8888888 Comment fourtec Device Firmware Battery level 1 Temperature Scale DC OF Options Cyclic run V Deep sleep mode turn on via keypad Push to run M Timer Run 23 58 2 Stop on key press Sampling Rate Interval 00 01 00 Averaging points i Sample Recording time 18 01 20 00 Setup amp Run Setup Figure 53 MicroLogPRO II Logger Setup window 124 FOURTEC This dialog provides non editable information such as the serial number battery level model number and firmware version of the current unit On the Properties and Sensors tabs the user is able to configure the following parameters Unit s comment Sampling rate Activation and memory modes Deep sleep mode Averaging points Temperature units C F on the logger LCD Active sensors Alarm levels Alarm delay In the Properties tab a Select the memory mode Cyclic or non Cyclic b Select the activation mode Push to Run Timer Run or leave the checkboxes unmarked for immediate activation c If you want the ability to stop the l
268. sage will be displayed Events Log Logs all events of each logger in the Report as well as the time of the event The events are e Setup e Run e Stop e Connection to network e Disconnection from network e Firmware updated including indication of previous and updated firmware version e Leave Network Unit Setup Log e Logs all the setups of the logger during the logging period e f no setups were performed during the report time frame the a No New Setup message will be displayed Unit Statistics Displays statistics for each sensor in the report The calculated parameters are e Min e Max e Average e Number of samples Sent Email Log Logs all emails that were sent during the report time frame The details in the Sent Emails Log are e Message that was sent e Date e Time e Towhom the message was sent groups will be displayed as groups Sent SMS Log Logs all SMS s that were sent during the report time frame The details in the Sent SMS Log are e Message that was sent e Date e Time e o whom the message was sent groups will be displayed as groups 242 f FOURTEC Received SMS Log Logs all SMS s that were sent to the DataSuite software during the report time frame The details in the Received SMS Log are Message that was received Date Time From whom the message was sent Sensor Graph The Sensor Graph log includes the following parameters Unit comment and S N indicated as the gra
269. section 18 2 for more details Show Network Path Displays the path of the Repeater RF data transmission to the Receiver The Transmission Strength legend appears in the bottom right of the screen when this feature is enabled Refer to section 17 7 1 for more details 195 FOURTEC Remove This option removes from the Map View any Repeater icons that are not on the network anymore and so are irrelevant 17 16 12 DataNet Repeater Icon Context Menu USB Connection Options Update Firmware Selecting this option will launch the Repeater firmware update process Refer to section 18 2 for more details Turn Off This option will turn the unit off and is password enabled Change to Receiver This option will change the Repeater to Receiver mode and form a network If the Repeater has end units connected to it performing this option could result in units losing their connection to the network Change to Substitute Receiver In the event that a Receiver is no longer working any existing Repeater on the Receiver s network can be transformed into a Substitute Receiver to enable the network to continue working in online mode 17 16 13 Viewing DataNet Repeater Status When you scroll the mouse cursor over the Repeater icon a tooltip will pop up displaying data relevant to the Repeater status at the time Repeater Tooltip The tooltip will always display the following data even if offline e Unit type Router e Serial Numb
270. sensor window will be displayed e Scrolling over the sensor window with the mouse cursor will bring up a tooltip displaying the following data Network Name for DataNet system Network ID for DataNet system Serial number Logger comment Battery level Last sample time Sensor type and reading Downloading data indication when relevant m Network Name DataNet network 2 Network ID 12 135 252 Serial Number 912486 Freezer Battery Level 86 Last sample time 25 10 11 15 14 04 Internal RH 55 8 17 5 3 History View Note In History View you can view data from multiple Fourtec products in the same view For example compare data from DataNet loggers side by side with MicroLogPRO II and DagLink loggers Clicking the History View button fey in the main toolbar will switch the main window to view archived offline data stored in the DataSuite directory on the workstation You must first open the archived data file by clicking Open File on the main toolbar When you open the data file it will be displayed in the History View otherwise the History View window will be blank Refer to section 17 14 Viewing Archived Offline Data on page 184 for more details on opening files in History View 162 FOURTEC at mia 4 amalit aw ee a SPN so hs M os be se lt _ serra v ta J gt 3 iS ae gt ww S aan Figure 76 Main window His
271. sly recorded data will be erased when you begin a new logging session 105 FOURTEC 9 6 Viewing Data Once you run the logger you have several ways of viewing the online data that is being acquired e Online graph table statistics views e Logger icon tooltip e Sensor view 9 6 1 Online Data Views Note Only the MicroLite models featuring internal sensors Temp and Temp RH support online data view Double clicking the Logger icon or selecting Display Data in the Logger icon context menu will open the online graph This graph is updated in real time with the newly recorded data You can switch between Graph Table and Statistics views to view the data in different formats Figure 47 Online data Graph view 106 FOURTEC mera Fr iowet romeo 2 bi y an o IR BnNN IST sn 2 oniinn Sat an i Bonen m t n 5 Bonen SET Rn Bnri ae ETA BOn ers maT mn WRS ST EZD r MGI2HI STT ET 1 Parara tla mare rt IMPIZISTIZ XATT ETA t ROS t t rt 247C ETS t IAI tea a n 1 IMpIZIEn merc ET 5 aastata are ET ie TERET Aa an 7 MDZ T ER a erene awe BI 9 ponies maT n Wena eT ETa 2 ot Ge Aae BN Panra Tae zoe bon Fe IHG OC an onre SIT ET 5 Figure 48 Online data Table view Sarr Device Senior Mirenum Maximum Statistics start Statistics end 0 CT ac 00 1303 12 18 19 130312 1818 9130212 toune lew hema RH 354 3 1303 12 18 17 13 03 12 18 18 Figure 49 O
272. sor to DataNet and DagLink data loggers e Updated sections 10 4 1 and 13 5 1 providing explanation on recognizing when MicroLite Il and MicroLogPRO II battery needs replacement e Updated section 10 1 Data Logger Layout with polarity of two wire Connector MicroLite II mA V and NTC external inputs e Updated section 17 20 Calibration Overview with more detailed explanation of calibration procedure using the DataSuite software including recommended calibration methodology Table of Contents WHAT S NEW IN THIS EDITION CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION CHAPTER 2 DATANET OVERVIEW 2 1 DataNet Introduction 2 2 What is ZigBee 2 3 The ZigBee Concept 2 3 1 ZigBee Mesh Network Operation 2 3 2 Why is ZigBee Technology Key for Data Logging 2 4 The DataNet System 2 4 1 The Data Logger 2 4 2 The Receiver Repeater 2 4 3 Hardware Accessories 2 4 4 DataSuite Software CHAPTER 3 DATANET IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE 3 1 DataNet Network Architecture 3 2 Pre setup Requirements 3 3 Launching the Software 3 4 Connecting the Receiver 3 5 Adding the Data Logger to the Network 3 5 1 Charging DataNet Loggers 3 5 2 Connecting DNL910 and DNL920 Loggers to the Network 3 5 3 Connecting Mini DataNet Loggers and Mini Repeater to the Network 3 5 4 Loading Map View Background 3 6 Configuring the Logger 3 7 Viewing Data 3 7 1 Online Data Views 3 7 2 Logger Tooltip 3 7 3 Sensor View 3 8 Optimizing the Network 3 8 1 Sig
273. t Menu 17 16 10 Viewing DataNet Receiver Status 17 16 11 DataNet Repeater Icon Context Menu Wireless Connection Options 169 169 169 169 169 169 169 170 170 170 170 183 184 184 17 16 12 DataNet Repeater Icon Context Menu USB Connection Options 17 16 13 Viewing DataNet Repeater Status 17 16 14 DagLink Logger Icon Connection Options 17 16 15 MicroLite Logger Icon Connection Options 17 16 16 Viewing MicroLite Logger Status 17 16 17 MicroLogPRO II Logger Icon Connection Options 17 16 18 Viewing MicroLogPRO II Logger Status 17 16 19 PicoLite Logger Icon Connection Options 17 16 20 Viewing PicoLite Logger Status 17 17 Configuring the Logger 17 17 1 DataNet Device Setup Tab 17 17 2 DaqLink Device Setup Tab 17 17 3 DataNet and DagLink Alarm Setup Tab 17 17 4 MicroLite amp MicroLogPRO II Setup Window 17 17 5 PicoLite Properties Sensor and Display Setup 17 17 6 Using the Auto Setup Mode 17 18 Entering Alarm Reason in CFR Mode 17 19 Alarm Notifications Setup 17 19 1 Contacts Tab 17 19 2 Groups Tab 17 19 3 Notifications Setup Tab 17 19 4 Email and SMS Notification Formats 17 20 Calibration Overview 17 20 1 Recommended Calibration Methodology 17 20 2 Logger Calibration Methods 17 20 3 Calibration Procedure 17 20 4 Performing a Two or Three point Calibration 17 20 5 Performing an Offset Calibration 17 20 6 Calibrating the Internal Temperature Sensor
274. t click the Logger icon and select Run from the context menu to start logging data 7 To stop the logger right click the Logger icon and select Stop from the context menu Note Running the logger clears the logger memory All previously recorded data will be erased when you begin a new logging session 3 7 Viewing Data Once you run the logger you have several ways of viewing the online data that is being acquired e Online graph table statistics views e Logger icon tooltip e Sensor view 3 7 1 Online Data Views Double clicking the Logger icon or selecting Display Data in the Logger icon context menu will open the online graph This graph is updated in real time with the newly recorded data You can switch between Graph Table and Statistics views to view the data in different formats 33 eres weer etre un p its Humes 13 53 17 0823 0 1 12 01 48 45 13 0 wy heas wye DOC Tl a it PISS Bld FE BAe Move Figure 11 Online data Graph view _Lnastnadiornssont Naas Narna karint Nort rene eret rete Dae ond Tew tanec ata thet mern S WEC But wor wet ware waT 1346 17 124037 IOR Pee CARRE 1300 12 tated MEO WT 13 17 12 aw 20T wa ISORI WET aarc 1303 12 124046 xHIC MIL teat oTt Ioh I2eoes JEET MPa WAC Istade Wit TMI eae VOT we MOD IZI2 WET BrT IDODI 1240S HIT MBIizess et Boros por DORI 2S EDT isosti tios MENT Teh 124s Hort IMGIDIZST WET iret
275. t is accessible and the adapter is not covered while in operation e Do not place the AC adapter on heat sensitive material 274 FCC ID for DataNet System For data loggers powered by external power supply do not charge the device while situated in a carrying case or without sufficient airflow surrounding the device T FOURTEC Do not expose the adapter to direct sunlight or water Do not tamper with the adapter components DNR900 FCC ID XGO DNR9XX This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is Subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation DNL920 FCC ID XGO DNL9XX This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is Subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation DNL910 PA FCC ID XGO DNL9XX PA This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation DNL804 FCC ID XGO DNL8XX This device complies with Part 15 of the
276. t logger to external power supply negative center Sensor Inputs Pluggable screw terminal blocks marked In 1 to In 4 from left to right to connect wide range of sensor types for data acquisition All four inputs can be used simultaneously Sensors can be connected in any order To connect a sensor to the DagLink data logger unplug the screw terminal connect the sensor s wires to the terminals and then plug the terminal back to the corresponding socket on the input block Excitation socket Output power socket used to power external sensors power derived directly from 12 V 2A external power supply adaptor 7 3 Data Logger Sensor Overview This section provides an overview of the hardware specifications of the DagLink data loggers 7 3 1 Internal Sensor Types The DBSA710 and DBSA720 loggers include internal sensors depending on the logger model Measurement Accuracy Logger Range Model 3 in DataSuite Digital Humidity 5 to 95 ene DBSA720 4 on logger LCD Digital P r r Temperature 20 C to 50 C 0 5 C DBSA720 Temperature 3 d r PT100 20 C to 50 C 0 3 C DBSA710 7 3 2 External Sensor Types DBSA710 and DBSA720 Each of the four input channels of these data logger models are multi purpose and can be individually configured to any of the following types and ranges Current 4 to 20 mA 0 5 In 1 to In 4 Contact Open 0 N A In 1 to In 4 Close 1 8 7 T FOURTEC I ee oe c
277. t readings recorded since the logger starting logging data irrelevant of how many cycles the logger has recorded The alarm notification remains until the next time you change the logger setup or run a new recording session 16 6 5 Push Button Functionality Overview The PicoLite push button performs two tasks e Start logging Configured Push to Run mode from the PicoLite setup window in DataSuite When the unit is not connected to the PC USB port press the button for three seconds The LED will then flash green for approximately four seconds to indicate the logger has started sampling e Mark atime stamp At any point while the logger is sampling press the button for at least one second to immediately record a new sample to the logger memory e g to indicate a specific event in the logged data 16 6 6 LED Functionality Overview The PicoLite features a bi color red green LED for real time sampling and alarm indication Full LED functionality is described below e Logger Connected to USB In Stop mode The LED will permanently indicate green as long as the unit is connected to the USB port In Run mode The LED will flash green every five seconds In Run mode while in alarm The LED will flash red every five seconds e Logger Not Connected to USB In Run mode The LED will flash green every five seconds In Run mode while in alarm The LED will flash red every five seconds LED will continue
278. tal Temperature C Display Tab MicroLogPRO II only Setup for EC850 8888888 2 Properties Sensors J Boomerang Report LCD Configuration When in Run mode only select duration for LCD to stay on after magnet key press or alarm Always on LCD Configuration The Display tab allows the user to select one of four LCD options e Always On The LCD will always remain on during logging e On for 30 60 or 120 seconds on key press and alarm Selecting one of these options will result in the LCD coming on for the defined period after the logger keypad is pressed or after an alarm is reached After the defined number of seconds the logger LCD will shut off again Even if the LCD is off the logger is continually recording data 213 T FOURTEC Power Saving Settings Tab MicroLite only Setup for MicroLite Temperature RH 32K 9130212 z Properties Sensors Power Saving Settings Boomerang Report Reduce the device s power consumption by configuring its LCD and LED settings For example disabling both the LED and LCD will dramatically extend battery life LCD Configuration When in Run mode only select duration for LCD to stay on after magnet key press or alarm Always on z LED Configuration Disable LED alarm indications while device is running The Power Saving Settings tab allows the user to configure the MicroLite s LCD and LED modes Reducing the usage of the LCD and LED will help extend t
279. talled Refer to section 17 25 for more details From any of the tabs click Setup and Run to begin logging or Setup if you wish to run the logger later 125 FOURTEC 8 The Logger icon will appear as follows when in Run mode ol 9 To stop the logger right click the Logger icon and select Stop from the context menu Note Running the logger clears the logger memory All previously recorded data will be erased when you begin a new logging session 12 6 Viewing Data Once you run the logger you have several ways of viewing the online data that is being acquired e Online graph table statistics views e Logger icon tooltip e Sensor view 12 6 1 Online Data Views Double clicking the Logger icon or selecting Display Data in the Logger icon context menu will open the online graph This graph is updated in real time with the newly recorded data You can switch between Graph Table and Statistics views to view the data in different formats a EEL L M out as eda a Figure 54 Online data Graph view 126 TODI hs DOPU 16 Ob 12 ws OPI 1ST Op 18 2a HOP 12 18 we r3Ob 17 oD i 7ns w amp 301 12 12 3301 Don Bee 303 12 Te Nn Tb t We rh 00 12 1h 08 2500 12 HEMOS Hoag ak DOU IENA Do1 tmn on 2 wt Donn nuni BOn urun BOn enan 30b 12 ti Ot WEHE ED Oe Ca J E ECE REESE wy z Figure 55 Online data Table view ah Table Seo Seria Number of teumiber Device Sensor
280. te Battery life depends on the logger sampling rate type of sensor and number of measured sensors 120 i f FOURTEC MicroLogPRO II Data Loggers Micro gr sax l 4 MicroLogPRO Part Number EC800 Part Number EC850 One internal NTC temperature sensor Two internal digital and humidity with external input and USB PC temperature sensors with external interface input and USB PC interface Memory Capacity 52 000 samples Memory Capacity 52 000 samples Power supply Battery operated Power supply Battery operated 11 2 2 Hardware Accessories The only accessory required for the MicroLogPRO II system is the mini USB cable for connecting the device to the PC 121 T FOURTEC Chapter 12 MicroLogPRO II Implementation Guide Fourtec recommends first time users of the MicroLogPRO II system read this chapter before drilling down into the many features of the system described later in the user guide The Implementation Guide will give you a clear understanding of the basic aspects of setting up the system and getting the data logger up and running 12 1 Pre setup Requirements Prior to commencing with the MicroLogPRO II implementation you must have the following requirements in place PC e 24 7 availability if online data monitoring is required e Reliable AC power e Sufficient hard disk space to store loggers data e One free USB port MicroLogPRO Il devices At least one MicroLogPRO II logger EC800 or EC850
281. te software DataNet Network ID 021 180 012 67 FOURTEC Receiver version This menu informs the user of the Receiver firmware version This is helpful when you need to upgrade the system firmware to check the current version Or when contacting Fourtec technical support with any technical issues Reset Unit When the unit is reset upon start up it will reconnect the network it previously formed and managed Turn Off Unit selecting this option will shut the unit down You can turn the unit on again by pressing the Scroll button When the Receiver is shutdown the network will be down as well as the end units wont be able to transmit to the Receiver Turn off unit It is recommended to turn off the unit when it is not in use 4 14 3 Changing Receiver to Repeater For users of DNR900 firmware 2 45 and higher use the DataSuite software to change the DNR900 from Receiver mode to Repeater mode Refer to section 17 16 for more details For users of firmware versions lower than 2 45 follow the instructions below Scroll through the Receiver menu until you reach the menu Change Unit Type to Repeater Change unit type to Repeater Press the Enter button to proceed with changing the unit to Repeater mode Once you perform this action any network the unit may have formed while in Receiver mode will be down and you will need to form a new network with another Receiver unit and join your existing loggers to that new networ
282. te the MicroLogPRO II data loggers and includes powerful tools for comprehensive data analysis Key MicroLogPRO II benefits include e Accurate portable USB data loggers e Measuring up to four parameters Temperature RH and Dew Point plus external sensors e External sensors include Temperature 4 20 mA 0 10 V e Connects with industry standard sensors e Unique Boomerang feature that automatically creates and emails PDF data report when logger is connected to PC e Feature rich software for data monitoring analysis and logger calibration e Low power consumption with up to 2 year battery life ideal for long haul monitoring e Multi function keypad supporting manual time stamp and Push to Run modes e View up to 30 days Min Max data history on LCD screen e Water and dust proof depending on logger model e Records months of data up to 52 000 samples e Built in LED for logging and alarm indication 11 2 MicroLogPRO II Packaging MicroLogPRO II data logger The data logger package contains the following items e One data logger of part number EC800 or EC850 e One nylon bag containing one screw screw anchor for wall mounting DataSuite software The software is used to configure the data logger as well as analyze the data following download to PC The software package is purchased separately to the data logger and contains 119 FOURTEC e One DataSuite CD including user documentation e One mini USB cable for conne
283. the computer via mini USB cable the MicroLogPRO II models support the following features Display Data Displays the logger s data in Graph view The graph displays the data in real time There is also the option to display the data in Table view or to view the data statistics Download Data Downloads all data in the logger memory to the DataSuite software When logger is downloading the data the Logger icon in Map View will appear as follows ep Cancel Download When logger is downloading data you may cancel the download per logger by selecting this menu item As cancelling the data download results in data not being downloaded to the computer there is a chance that data may be lost if the download isn t completed at a later stage and the logger s cyclic memory has meanwhile erased these readings Calibration Refer to section 17 19 4 on page 224 for an overview of the Calibration feature Note A logger can t be calibrated while it is in Run mode The option will be grayed out You must Stop the logger first Update Firmware Selecting this feature will commence update of the logger firmware as long as the firmware file is situated in the main DataSuite directory Note If the logger is currently in Push to Run or Timer Run mode Update Firmware option will be disabled Setup Refer to section 17 17 on page 196 for an overview of how to setup the logger Multi Setup By using multi setup you can select more
284. the logger icon and select Download Data 3 View the downloaded data by double clicking the logger icon 145 T FOURTEC Chapter 16 PicoLite Hardware Overview This chapter details the hardware features of the PicoLite data logger 16 1 Data Logger Layout Temp sensor Button for location Start Mark Time Stamp operation Logger USB cap with 7 ng A internal rubber seal Hole for attaching string key chain etc LED 7A 16 2 PicoLite Sensor Overview Measurement Accuracy Range Temperature NTC 40 C to 40 C 0 5 C 16 2 1 Sensor Calibration The PicoLite data loggers are shipped fully calibrated However further calibration can be applied via the DataSuite software The calibration parameters are sent to the data loggers via USB connection and stored in the logger s memory Refer to section 17 20 for more details 16 3 Unit Serial Number and Comment Every PicoLite data logger unit is embedded with a unique serial number The data logger only can be loaded with a descriptive comment to identify its task and location You may add or edit the logger comment via the DataSuite software Every time data is transferred to the computer it is labeled both with the logger s serial number and comment and is displayed in the graph or data table view The unit serial number is also marked on a sticker below the unit s USB connector 16 4 PicoLite Battery The PicoLite data loggers run fro
285. the network press the unit button again for three seconds The LED will blink red three times to indicate Leave Network command has been received The unit icon will be removed from the software Map View 5 To rescan for network give the unit button a short press The unit will search for a network and will indicate it has joined a network by emitting a solid green LED for five seconds Note If there are multiple DataNet networks in your environment make sure that the unit SN is listed in the Device Filter of only one of these networks otherwise you can t control which network it will join first and you will have to rescan the networks several times 4 13 4 Leave Network To leave the current network when the unit is on 1 Press and hold the unit button until the LED emits a fixed red light for at least three seconds 2 Release the unit button 3 To leave the network press the unit button again for three seconds The LED will blink red three times to indicate Leave Network command has been received The unit icon will be removed from the software Map View The unit is now off 4 13 5 Running Signal Test You may run a signal test on the logger or Mini Repeater to check the signal strength to the parent unit 66 FOURTEC Right click the unit icon on the Map View and select the Signal Test option The signal test will be performed on the unit with the following parameters indicating signal quality e Good LED b
286. the online Graph view 6 8 Downloading Data If the logger is being used as a standalone device you will have to connect it to the computer via USB cable in order to download the data to the software 1 Connect logger to PC and go to Devices gt Detect Device in the main menu 2 To download data right click the logger icon and select Download Data 3 View the downloaded data by double clicking the logger icon 85 FOURTEC Chapter 7 DaqLink Hardware Overview This chapter details the hardware features of the DagLink data loggers 7 1 Data Logger Front Panel Layout 7 1 1 DBSA710 and DBSA720 Apart from the color scheme the DBSA710 and DBSA720 data logger models have the same front panel design LCD screen Menu Enter button Scroll button Figure 39 DBSA710 data logger front panel LCD screen Displays logger status and logger data Menu Enter button Use to enter logger menu options and to execute logger commands Scroll button Use to scroll though menu items and to power on unit 7 2 Data Logger External Connections 7 2 1 DBSA710 and DBSA720 External connections of the DBSA710 and DBSA720 are exactly the same Mini USB port 12 V power socket Negative Center Four sensor Excitation inputs Figure 40 DBSA720 data logger external connections 86 FOURTEC Mini USB Port To enable communication between logger and PC for configuration and data download 12 V Power Socket To connec
287. the open graph view when the user is either in Online Data Display e Fourier Syste The toolbar cannot be moved or hidden 167 AR ay x Hil ar FOURTEC Data Map in History View only Hides or shows the Data Map pane in the History View window Plot Legend in Display Data View only Hides or shows the sensor labels from the bottom of the graph Autoscale Returns the data to its default scale Zoom in Zooms in on the graph data Pan graph Pans the graph along the x or y axis Select first cursor Adds a cursor to the designated plot on the graph Select second cursor Adds a second cursor to the designated plot on the graph Grid Adds a grid to the graph background Show Hide Time Stamp Shows or hides the time stamp markers on the graph Add Custom View in History View only adds the open customized graph view to the Data Map Copy graph Copies the graph to your clipboard to be copied to a document or spreadsheet for example Graph properties Opens the Graph Properties window Export to Excel Export the open data sets to Excel format Print Opens the Print dialog Available for graph table and statistics views Table 5 Lower graph toolbar icon list 17 5 8 Data Map Icons i A al h Te T Displayed internal Temperature sensor data set Hidden internal Temperature sensor data set Displayed internal Humidity sensor dat
288. tions on the units LCD screen 7 8 1 Turning on the Unit In order to view the menu options the unit must be powered on by pressing the Scroll button the AC adapter Once the unit is switched on it will emit a short beep and the screen will display a welcome message DagLink DBSA710 Ready 7 8 2 Display Shutdown on the keypad Ensure the logger is charged or connected to lf the logger screen is inactive for thirty seconds it will turn off However the logger will continue to operate in the background Press the Scroll button to enable the LCD screen again The screen will not turn off during firmware upgrade 7 8 3 Main Menu Options There are two menu categories on the data logger e View Data e Status Note If the unit is not in Run mode only the Status menu options will be available 94 f FOURTEC Press the Menu amp button to reach the main menu display Scroll through the main menu options View Data Status using the Scroll button Once you reach the main menu option you need press Enter to select that option and enter the sub menus View Data Menu View Data Note View Data is the default page when the unit is running If there is more than one sensor running the screen will auto scroll between the sensors showing the sensor name and senor value These are real time displays The display will switch back to the View Data screen after five minutes if none of logger buttons have been pressed
289. to the computer hard disk for example you will be able to restore the critical files containing all the device data and configurations of the DataSuite itself It will also enable you to setup mirror installations using the same devices 17 6 6 Restore System Files Once the system files have been backed up use this feature to restore them to the DataSuite workstation or to another computer 169 FOURTEC 17 6 7 Print Map View Prints the current Map View with all unit icons including their network paths and name tags 17 6 8 Exit Exits the DataSuite application 17 7 DataNet Network Menu Items This menu is specifically for DataNet users and applies to all DataNet networks currently detected by the software Additional Network menu items are accessible via the Receiver context menu by right clicking the Receiver icon in Map View 17 7 1 Show All Network Paths While in Map View enable this option to display the path that the RF signal of all units in the network takes to reach the Receiver If Repeaters are used in the network it will show the signal routed via the Repeater en route to the Receiver gt E ACET rR i 2 iy S aa is M The paths are color coded so you can also see the transmission strength A legend appears at the bottom of the window Transmission Strength ee vin e Red Low 0 to 23 strength e Yellow Medium 23 to 56 e Green High 56 to 100
290. to section 17 16 for more details on working in Map View 17 5 2 Sensor View Clicking the Sensor View button E in the main toolbar switches the main DataSuite window to a display where sensor data is represented in individual windows All sensors which are currently online will be displayed in this view If a logger is currently offline then its data will not be visible 160 Figure 75 Main window Sensor View There are two modes for viewing the sensor data which may be toggled by going to Tools gt Switch Sensor View Mode in the main menu e Expanded view In this view the logger comment sensor type and sensor data is displayed e Slim view In this view only the sensor type and sensor data is displayed Sensor in Alarm When the sensor data is in alarm the color of the sensor window will change according to the alarm type There is a legend in the lower right corner of the main window Alarm Level iiom Pre Low Normal Pre High IGE For example This screenshot indicates that the Internal Digital Temperature reading is in High alarm while the Internal Relative Humidity reading is at normal levels 161 FOURTEC Additional Features e The sensor windows may be dragged and placed anywhere on the screen e Double clicking the sensor window will open the Data Display window where the real time sensor data is displayed in graph or table view e When the logger is downloading data a message in the
291. todata Client Use the Uptodata client to perform automatic checks for updated DataSuite software module and firmware versions including updated versions of this DataNet user guide Once downloaded DataSuite software and device firmware is automatically updated However you also have the option to manually update firmware rather than automatically To use the Uptodata client follow the instructions below 1 Ensure the computer is connected to the Internet and launch DataSuite 2 Launch the Uptodata update client from the DataSuite main menu Help gt Check for Updates 3 You will be prompted to proceed to check for new updates Click Next The client will then check for updates on the server including updates to the Uptodata client itself 248 Chick Next to proosed to check for new updates Figure 106 Uptodata dialog 4 Once the check is complete any new updates will be displayed in the Uptodata dialog Select the checkbox next to the file you wish to update and click Next Updates available eof gt Firmware V gt Uptodata Client aod ap Language V gt Validata V gt Common Application Components V gt PDF Components C 5 The files will be downloaded to your default application directory Click Finish to close the dialog once the download is complete gt PDF Components Koen 6 Click the Options se icon in the main Uptodata dialog to configure the Autoupdate o
292. tory View In History View the user may view the data in graph or table format by clicking the relevant tabs as well as view a number of Statistics taken from the data set To learn the functionality of the lower graph toolbar refer to section 17 5 5 below Note Users of Windows 7 using right to left language settings e g Hebrew may have problems viewing the Date Time in the DataSuite graph This is a Known Microsoft bug Until a bug fix is released change the Regional Settings to English 17 5 4 Data Map The History View window also includes the Data Map pane on the left of the window The Data Map displays all data sets opened in History View saved in the current project file and includes nodes for each sensor in the data set Clicking the sensor label removes the data from the graph When the label is black the data is not displayed on the graph The sensor data plot color is matched to the color of the sensor label in the Data Map Each data set is preceded by a Logger icon Lay which can be expanded or collapsed to display the associated sensor data Clicking the Tree icon in the lower graph toolbar removes the Data Map pane altogether allowing a full screen graph view ee Loggers fourtec DataNet 808756 Data Map Wes Internal RH fe Current 4 20 m k Custom Wiews Figure 77 Data Map 163 FOURTEC 17 5 5 DataSuite Toolbar Icons This section outlines all
293. ts you want to use and then select the sensor types from the adjacent drop down menu You don t have to select the external sensor input in any order You may select only Input 4 if you desire Note On the DBSA720 you cannot run the humidity sensor without running the temperature sensor in parallel This is because when using the DBSA720 data logger and selecting the internal humidity sensor in the Device Setup dialog the internal digital temperature sensor will automatically be selected as well This sensor provides the temperature compensation necessary for the humidity sensor to reach the 3 accuracy as stated in the sensor specifications It is not used for recording temperature The internal digital sensor is used to record temperature on the DBSA720 Custom Sensor Names You can also give the sensor a custom name which will appear in the software when viewing the data This is convenient when using several of the same type of sensors and you wish to differentiate between them in terms of their environment or material it is measuring Recording Time This field displays the length of time the logger memory will be able to record for depending upon the number of sensors used and sampling rate Setup and Run Clicking Setup and Run will send the setup to the logger and immediately start logging data Setup Only Clicking Setup Only will send the setup to the logger but it will not actually start logging data You will need to
294. uA display 4 mV software 4 uA software 18 2 System Requirements Software Hardware OS Platform Windows XP SP3 Processor Pentium 4 2 0 GHz or Windows Vista and Windows 7 82 and _ better 64 bit Memory 512 MB RAM Screen Resolution Minimum 1024 x Storage Memory 250 MB available 768 disk space for the DataSuite application 268 Appendix E T FOURTEC PicoLite Specifications 18 3 Internal Temperature sensor range Temperature accuracy Memory capacity Sampling rate LED Keypad PC Connection Power supply Battery life Dimensions Weight Standards Compliance General Specifications PICOLITE 16K 40 to 40 C 0 5 C 16 000 One per minute to once per 18 hours Bi color red green LED for sampling alarm manual time stamp and firmware update indication Push button for starting logging and marking manual time stamps Via direct USB interface Non replaceable 3V CR2032 battery Six months in normal ambient conditions Five year shelf life prior to initial use 74mm x 30 mm x 13 mm 15g CE EN12830 18 4 System Requirements Software OS Platform Windows XP SP3 Windows Vista and Windows 7 32 and 64 bit Screen Resolution Minimum 1024 x 768 Hardware Processor Pentium 4 2 0 GHz or better Memory 512 MB RAM Storage Memory 250 MB available disk space for the DataSuite application 269 FOURTEC Appendix F DataNet Mounting Diagrams This app
295. uct specific Refer to section 17 25 on page 244 for more details regarding the Boomerang feature The main logger configuration is performed on the Properties tab The Sensor and Alarm setup is performed on the Sensors tab and LCD LED options are available on the Display or Power Saving Settings tab depending on the product Setup for EC850 8888888 Properties Sensors Display Boomerang Report Identifiers SN 8888888 Comment fourtec Device Firmware Battery level 100 Temperature Scale C F Options F Cyclic run 7 Deep sleep mode turn on via keypad F Push to run M Timer Run 13 26 32 Stop on key press Sampling Rate Interval 00 01 00 H Averaging points 1 7 Samples Recording time 18 01 20 00 cay Setup amp Run Setup Close Figure 90 MicroLogPRO II Properties tab 210 FOURTEC Properties Tab Comment This is the name of the logger and supports up to 15 characters It is advisable to name the logger according to the location in the facility Note The Comment field in the software supports all standard alohanumeric characters except for the following amp Temperature Scale Toggle between C and F This applies to the readings displayed on the logger LCD as well as in the software Options e Cyclic Run Select to enable the logger memory to continue running in cyclic mode whereby the logger will not stop once the memor
296. uite software showing a map of your facility in order to place the Logger icons in their relative positions As you deploy more standalone loggers this will prove very helpful e Double click the Map View background to browse to the image directory and load the image Remember to unlock the Map View in order to move the icons around e Right click the Map View background and two options will be available Load Wallpaper and Reset Wallpaper which resets to the default Fourtec wallpaper 6 6 Configuring the Logger Once the software has detected the DagLink logger you must configure the unit in order to start acquiring data 1 Right click on the Logger icon Select Setup from the context menu 2 The Setup window will be launched 81 f FOURTEC Device Sef Aam Seug Dommert Commnert on LCD Samglieg raie hes Eo Forrware rot Memory Stste Bethery Level 50 Aree agg ports yoi Mode Terpersture urets li J trtermal Terpereture eternal Hurredhy mtorr Tarer hare Setup and Ren Figure 33 DagLink Logger Setup window This dialog provides non editable information such as the serial number battery level and firmware version of the current unit On the Device Setup and Alarm Setup tabs the user is able to configure the following parameters Unit s comment Sampling rate Memory State Averaging points Temperature units C F on the logger LCD Anti tamper mode Active sensors Cust
297. und X Display Data Download Data Calibration Update Firmware Setup Run To locate the device on the Map View itself simply click on the device row in the Search Results box and the icon will flash three times with a red outline mi I 17 12 Data Recovery For DataNet Loggers The ability to recover data when part of the system goes offline or is shutdown is a key feature of the DataSuite system Note USB enabled DataNet data loggers support data download via USB if wireless transfer is not possible When the data loggers are acquiring data they transmit to the Receiver at the predefined rate either directly or via one or more Repeaters There may be occasions when the data transmission fails and the data is not updated in real time in the software window When this happens the software has several ways of recovering the data so the user will always be able to view all samples recorded by the logger The online system will never lose data i e the data integrity will always been maintained lf the end unit tries to send data to the Receiver but fails it will continually try to send the data until it succeeds In such a case the software or workstation may be shutdown or its parent unit the Repeater may be offline Or the end unit itself may go offline due to a drained battery Once the end unit has reconnected with the network for instance when the software is reopened or the Repeater is back online it
298. uter s CD drive The DataSuite Installation Wizard automatically starts running 3 The Wizard first installs Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 if not already detected on the computer The DataSuite software requires this platform in order to run Follow the installation instructions to install the NET Framework on your PC This step can take up to two minutes to complete Click Finish once installation is complete Note If NET Framework is already installed on your computer this step is skipped 4 The main DataSuite Installation Wizard now resumes Follow the installation instructions to install DataSuite on your computer The installation process includes a silent installation of the latest version of the Silicon Laboratories USB driver This driver is required for detection of the DataNet and DagLink hardware 5 Click Finish at the end of the installation wizard Double click the DataSuite ra shortcut on your desktop mew 4 launch the software 6 The Welcome to DataSuite window will open prompting the user to activate the relevant products before use 151 i Welcome to DataSuite Product Activation e Please select the products you intend to use e For modules requiring activation click Activate and use the license key located on the DataSuite software package or start a free 30 day trial period M 0 DataNet MicroLogPRO II 7 Select the checkbox next to the product or products you intend to use For products
299. w Icons The following icons representing the various statuses of the devices are viewed in Map View Using these icons the user is aware of the status of each unit e g offline online alarm power etc Alarm status is also indicated Green Normal Red Alarm DataNet Icons Z Po Psy re Pi Pu Pon Poi ry hy Po Pii l lt gt SS ome lt y r5 Receiver is online and connected to the PC Receiver is offline possibly as USB cable has been disconnected or it was removed from external power supply and backup battery drained Logger newly acquired by network and awaiting Setup Running from internal battery supply Logger newly acquired by network and awaiting Setup Running from external power supply Logger which has received its Setup but is in Stop mode Running from internal battery supply Logger which has received its Setup but is in Stop mode Running from external power supply Logger in Run mode and running on internal battery supply Green indicates there are no alarms Logger in Run mode and running on external power supply Green indicates there are no alarms Logger in Run mode with an alarm alert Running from internal battery supply Logger in Run mode with an alarm alert Running from external power supply Logger is offline and is no longer detected on the network Its power supply may have failed or it s out of range of the Receiver Logger is processing a command sent from th
300. w calibration settings 17 20 10 New Calibration Mechanism when Updating MicroLite and MicroLogPRO II Firmware In new firmware released in January 2013 for MicroLite and MicroLogPRO II data loggers a fundamental redesign of the calibration mechanism has made necessary the removal of existing calibration settings from the logger memory These changes were made in MicroLite II firmware v1 01 and MicroLogPRO II firmware v2 00 Upgrading to these versions will result in existing calibration settings being erased including the default factory settings 231 f FOURTEC Note Calibration settings are erased only when updating firmware from MicroLite II v0 95 or MicroLogPRO II v1 31 Any subsequent firmware update from v1 01 or v2 00 to newer versions will not affect existing calibration settings To retain existing calibration settings do not update your loggers with the new firmware If unsure consult Fourtec technical support Saving Calibration as Factory Default If you proceed with the firmware update DataSuite provides the user with one opportunity to save any calibration performed on these devices as the default calibration settings which cannot then be erased The option Save Factory Calibration Default will be available via the logger Calibration menu after firmware update to above mentioned versions Generally DataSuite does not allow the user to save calibration settings as factory default but in this case an exception
301. y location on your computer Using the Load Setup option from the Logger icon menu of another MicroLite you can then load the setup file to other units and run them without even opening the Setup dialog For mass deployment of MicroLite units using the same setup file you must first save the default setup file and then enable the Auto Setup mode from the Devices menu Auto Setup mode allows fast setup of all supported devices For more details on using this feature refer to section 17 17 6 Stop Sends a command to the logger to stop logging data Run Sends a command to the logger to start logging data This command will also clear the existing logger memory Remove This option removes from the Map View icons of loggers that are no longer in use 17 16 16 Viewing MicroLite Logger Status MicroLite Logger Tooltip MicroLite Temperature 32 K Serial Number 9137425 New Device Battery Level 100 Version 1 0 0 83 Last Sample Time 30 10 11 22 12 46 Internal NTC ML IN 24 19 C In online mode the logger displays e Device model and memory size e Serial Number e Device Name e Battery status in e Logger firmware version number e Last sample time If logger is running time stamp of last recorded sample e Real time Sensor values All sensor values are displayed including sensor name and alarm status 199 f FOURTEC 17 16 17 MicroLogPRO II Logger Icon Connection Options When connected to
302. y the logger readings in accordance with the calibration methodology outlined in section 17 20 1 above 5 Ifthe measured values are still not within spec following verification use Offset calibration to fine tune the values further if Offset is indeed supported 229 f FOURTEC 17 20 5 Performing an Offset Calibration Offset calibration method is used as follows e To calibrate inputs supporting Offset calibration only e g Thermocouple for DataNet DaqLink loggers e o fine tune logger readings calibrated using two or three point calibration method e o fine tune individual inputs for DataNet or DaqLink loggers following two or three point calibration method applied on All inputs The offset value is the difference between the value displayed by the logger and the reference value For example if the reference reading shows 0 C and the logger reads 1 C the offset value is 1 but if the logger reads 1 C then the offset value is 1 To perform an Offset calibration 1 From the Calibration window once the relevant input has been selected click the Offset calibration radio button to enable the Offset window 2 Enter the offset value in the Offset field and click Send Calibration 3 Continue to adjust the offset accordingly until satisfied with the measured readings 17 20 6 Calibrating the Internal Temperature Sensor for DataNet and DaqLink Loggers The DataNet DNL910 and DNL910 PA and DagLink DBSA71
303. y capacity is reached but will erase the first samples in memory If this option is left unchecked the logger will stop when the memory is full e Push to Run Select to enable logger activation via the device keypad by pressing both buttons together to start running MicroLogPRO II or via the magnet key MicroLite II e Timer Run Select the time at which the logger should start running Until that time the logger will remain in standby mode e Stop on key press Select to enable the user to stop the logger running via the keypad MicroLogPRO II or magnet key MicroLite II and not just via the software e Stop on cap removal For MicroLite II External input models only Select to enable the logger to stop recording data when the external cap is disconnected from the main body of the logger This prevents garbage data being recorded when the external sensor is disconnected The logger will stop when the next sample is due to be recorded e Deep sleep mode For MicroLogPRO II only Select to run the logger in deep sleep mode While in Stop mode the logger will shut down after two minutes of inactivity and enter deep sleep in order to conserve battery To wake up from deep sleep the Min Max hour button must be pressed If deep sleep mode is not selected the logger will always stay on and consume more battery However it can be connected to USB and not require pressing the keypad to wake up e Show Min Max samples on LC
304. y will result in logger memory being erased but the configuration will be retained Unfasten the three screws on the back of the MicroLogPRO Il 4 Carefully remove the back cover 3 Replace the battery and be sure to insert the new battery into the correct corresponding polarities 4 Refasten the three screws on the back of the MicroLogPRO Il 13 6 USB Communication Cable A mini USB communication cable is supplied as part of the DataSuite software kit This cable connects the MicroLogPRO II data logger to the DataSuite PC workstation When connected to the PC the logger can communicate with the software for configuration and data download purposes for example The USB cable also powers the logger when connected to the PC but it does not charge the internal battery Type B plug ma Connect to PC USB port rif Type A plug Connect to logger USB port Figure 62 USB communication cable 133 f FOURTEC 13 7 LCD Overview The MicroLogPRO II has a 4 digit 7 segment LCD screen which is able to display the following information e The sensor reading currently recorded e Sensor reading of up to three decimal places if the reading integer is less than 10 e g 2 543 V e lf logger is in Stop Timer Run or Push to Run modes e Low or High alarm indication e Min Max readings e Full logger memory status e Marking of a time stamp e External Cap is not connected external input models only e Battery level

DataSuite User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents